Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

XII Physics

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 283

KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

KOLKATA REGION

STUDY MATERIAL
CLASS – XII
SUBJECT: PHYSICS
Session: 2023-24

कोलकाता संभाग
के न्द्रीय विद्यालय संगठन, कोलकाता संभाग
KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, REGIONAL OFFICE,
KOLKATA

SH SANJIB SINHA SH C. VIJAYA SH DIBAKARA SH AMIT


ASSISTANT RATNAM BHOI BAIDYA
COMMISSIONER ASSISTANT ASSISTANT
ASSISTANT
COMMISSIONER COMMISSIONER COMMISSIONER
CLASS XII (2023-24)
PHYSICS (THEORY)

Time: 3 hrs. Max Marks: 70

No. of Marks
Periods
Unit–I Electrostatics
Chapter–1: Electric Charges and Fields
26
Chapter–2: Electrostatic Potential and 16
Capacitance
Unit-II Current Electricity
18
Chapter–3: Current Electricity
Unit-III Magnetic Effects of Current and Magnetism
25
Chapter–4: Moving Charges and Magnetism
Chapter–5: Magnetism and Matter 17
Unit-IV Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating
Currents 24
Chapter–6: Electromagnetic Induction
Chapter–7: Alternating Current
Unit–V Electromagnetic Waves
04
Chapter–8: Electromagnetic Waves
Unit–VI Optics 18
30
Chapter–9: Ray Optics and Optical
Instruments
Chapter–10: Wave Optics
Unit–VII Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter
Chapter–11: Dual Nature of Radiation and 8
Matter 12
Unit–VIII Atoms and Nuclei
15
Chapter–12: Atoms
Chapter–13: Nuclei
Unit–IX Electronic Devices
Chapter–14: Semiconductor 10
Electronics: Materials, Devices and 7
Simple Circuits
Total 160 70
Unit I: Electrostatics 26 Periods

Chapter–1: Electric Charges and Fields

Electric charges, Conservation of charge, Coulomb's law-force between


two- point charges, forces between multiple charges; superposition principle
and continuous charge distribution.

Electric field, electric field due to a point charge, electric field lines, electric
dipole, electric field due to a dipole, torque on a dipole in uniform electric
field.

Electric flux, statement of Gauss's theorem and its applications to find field
due to infinitely long straight wire, uniformly charged infinite plane sheet
and uniformly charged thin spherical shell (field inside and outside).

Chapter–2: Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance

Electric potential, potential difference, electric potential due to a point


charge, a dipole and system of charges; equipotential surfaces, electrical
potential energy of a system of two-point charges and of electric dipole in
an electrostatic field.

Conductors and insulators, free charges and bound charges inside a


conductor. Dielectrics and electric polarization, capacitors and capacitance,
combination of capacitors in series and in parallel, capacitance of a parallel
plate capacitor with and without dielectric medium between the plates,
energy stored in a capacitor (no derivation, formulae only).

Unit II: Current Electricity 18 Periods

Chapter–3: Current Electricity

Electric current, flow of electric charges in a metallic conductor, drift


velocity, mobility and their relation with electric current; Ohm's law, V-I
characteristics (linear and non-linear), electrical energy and power,
electrical resistivity and conductivity, temperature dependence of
resistance, Internal resistance of a cell, potential difference and emf of a
cell, combination of cells in series and in parallel, Kirchhoff's rules,
Wheatstone bridge.
Unit III: Magnetic Effects of Current and Magnetism 25 Periods

Chapter–4: Moving Charges and Magnetism

Concept of magnetic field, Oersted's experiment.

Biot - Savart law and its application to current carrying circular loop.

Ampere's law and its applications to infinitely long straight wire. Straight
solenoid (only qualitative treatment), force on a moving charge in uniform
magnetic and electric fields.

Force on a current-carrying conductor in a uniform magnetic field, force


between two parallel current-carrying conductors-definition of ampere,
torque experienced by a current loop in uniform magnetic field; Current loop
as a magnetic dipole and its magnetic dipole moment, moving coil
galvanometer- its current sensitivity and conversion to ammeter and
voltmeter.

Chapter–5: Magnetism and Matter

Bar magnet, bar magnet as an equivalent solenoid (qualitative treatment


only), magnetic field intensity due to a magnetic dipole (bar magnet) along
its axis and perpendicular to its axis (qualitative treatment only), torque on a
magnetic dipole (bar magnet) in a uniform magnetic field (qualitative
treatment only), magnetic field lines.

Magnetic properties of materials- Para-, dia- and ferro -


magnetic substances with examples, Magnetization of materials,
effect of temperature on magnetic properties.

Unit IV: Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Currents 24 Periods

Chapter–6: Electromagnetic Induction

Electromagnetic induction; Faraday's laws, induced EMF and current;


Lenz's Law, Self and mutual induction.
Chapter–7: Alternating Current

Alternating currents, peak and RMS value of alternating current/voltage;


reactance and impedance; LCR series circuit (phasors only), resonance,
power in AC circuits, power factor, wattless current.
AC generator, Transformer.

Unit V: Electromagnetic waves 04 Periods

Chapter–8: Electromagnetic Waves

Basic idea of displacement current, Electromagnetic waves, their


characteristics, their transverse nature (qualitative idea only).

Electromagnetic spectrum (radio waves, microwaves, infrared, visible,


ultraviolet, X-rays, gamma rays) including elementary facts about their uses.

Unit VI: Optics 30 Periods

Chapter–9: Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Ray Optics: Reflection of light, spherical mirrors, mirror formula, refraction


of light, total internal reflection and optical fibers, refraction at spherical
surfaces, lenses, thin lens formula, lens maker’s formula, magnification,
power of a lens, combination of thin lenses in contact, refraction of light
through a prism.

Optical instruments: Microscopes and astronomical telescopes (reflecting


and refracting) and their magnifying powers.

Chapter–10: Wave Optics

Wave optics: Wave front and Huygen’s principle, reflection and refraction
of plane wave at a plane surface using wave fronts. Proof of laws of
reflection and refraction using Huygen’s principle. Interference, Young's
double slit experiment and expression for fringe width (No derivation final
expression only), coherent sources and sustained interference of light,
diffraction due to a single slit, width of central maxima (qualitative treatment
only).
Unit VII: Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 08 Periods

Chapter–11: Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Dual nature of radiation, Photoelectric effect, Hertz and Lenard's

observations; Einstein's photoelectric equation-particle nature of light.

Experimental study of photoelectric effect

Matter waves-wave nature of particles, de-Broglie relation.


Unit VIII: Atoms and Nuclei 15 Periods

Chapter–12: Atoms

Alpha-particle scattering experiment; Rutherford's model of atom; Bohr


model of hydrogen atom, Expression for radius of nth possible orbit, velocity
and energy of electron in nth orbit, hydrogen line spectra (qualitative
treatment only).

Chapter–13: Nuclei

Composition and size of nucleus, nuclear force

Mass-energy relation, mass defect; binding energy per nucleon and its
variation with mass number; nuclear fission, nuclear fusion.

Unit IX: Electronic Devices 10 Periods

Chapter–14: Semiconductor Electronics: Materials, Devices and


Simple Circuits

Energy bands in conductors, semiconductors and insulators (qualitative


ideas only) Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors- p and n type, p-n junction

Semiconductor diode - I-V characteristics in forward and reverse


bias, application of junction diode -diode as a rectifier.
PRACTICALS
Total Periods 60

The record to be submitted by the students at the time of their annual examination has to
include:

Record of at least 8 Experiments [with 4 from each section], to be performed by


the students.

Record of at least 6 Activities [with 3 each from section A and section B], to be
performed by the students.

The Report of the project carried out by the students.

Evaluation Scheme

Max. Marks: 30
Time 3 hours

Two experiments one from each section 7+7 Marks


Practical record [experiments and activities] 5 Marks
One activity from any section 3 Marks
Investigatory Project 3 Marks
Viva on experiments, activities and project 5 Marks
Total 30 marks

Experiments SECTION–A

1. To determine resistivity of two / three wires by plotting a graph for potential


difference versus current.

2. To find resistance of a given wire / standard resistor using metre bridge.

3. To verify the laws of combination (series) of resistances using a metre bridge.

OR

To verify the laws of combination (parallel) of resistances using a metre bridge.


4. To determine resistance of a galvanometer by half-deflection method and to find its
figure of merit.

5. To convert the given galvanometer (of known resistance and figure of merit) into a
voltmeter of desired range and to verify the same.

OR

To convert the given galvanometer (of known resistance and figure of merit) into an
ammeter of desired range and to verify the same.

6. To find the frequency of AC mains with a sonometer.

Activities

1. To measure the resistance and impedance of an inductor with or without iron core.

2. To measure resistance, voltage (AC/DC), current (AC) and check continuity


of a given circuit using multimeter.

3. To assemble a household circuit comprising three bulbs, three (on/off) switches, a

fuse and a power source.

4. To assemble the components of a given electrical circuit.

5. To study the variation in potential drop with length of a wire for a steady current.

6. To draw the diagram of a given open circuit comprising at least a battery,


resistor/rheostat, key, ammeter and voltmeter. Mark the components that are not
connected in proper order and correct the circuit and also the circuit diagram.

SECTION-B
Experiments
1. To find the value of v for different values of u in case of a concave mirror and to find
the focal length.
2. To find the focal length of a convex mirror, using a convex lens.
3. To find the focal length of a convex lens by plotting graphs between u and v
or between 1/u and 1/v.
4. To find the focal length of a concave lens, using a convex lens.
5. To determine angle of minimum deviation for a given prism by plotting a graph
between angle of incidence and angle of deviation.
6. To determine refractive index of a glass slab using a travelling microscope.

7. To find the refractive index of a liquid using convex lens and plane mirror.

8. To find the refractive index of a liquid using a concave mirror and a plane mirror.

9. To draw the I-V characteristic curve for a p-n junction diode in forward and
reverse bias.

Activities

1. To identify a diode, an LED, a resistor and a capacitor from a mixed collection of


such items.
2. Use of multimeter to see the unidirectional flow of current in case of a diode and an
LED and check whether a given electronic component (e.g., diode) is in working
order.
3. To study effect of intensity of light (by varying distance of the source) on an LDR.
4. To observe refraction and lateral deviation of a beam of light incident obliquely on a
glass slab.

5. To observe diffraction of light due to a thin slit.


6. To study the nature and size of the image formed by a (i) convex lens, or (ii)
concave mirror, on a screen by using a candle and a screen (for different
distances of the candle from the lens/mirror).
7. To obtain a lens combination with the specified focal length by using two lenses
from the given set of lenses.

Suggested Investigatory Projects

1. To study various factors on which the internal resistance/EMF of a cell depends.

2. To study the variations in current flowing in a circuit containing an LDR because of


a variation in

(a) the power of the incandescent lamp, used to 'illuminate' the LDR (keeping
all the lamps at a fixed distance).
(b) the distance of a incandescent lamp (of fixed power) used to 'illuminate'
the LDR.

3. To find the refractive indices of (a) water (b) oil (transparent) using a plane mirror,
an equiconvex lens (made from a glass of known refractive index) and an
adjustable object needle.

4. To investigate the relation between the ratio of (i) output and input voltage and (ii)
number of turns in the secondary coil and primary coil of a self-designed
transformer.

5. To investigate the dependence of the angle of deviation on the angle of incidence


using a hollow prism filled one by one, with different transparent fluids.

6. To estimate the charge induced on each one of the two identical Styrofoam (or pith)
balls suspended in a vertical plane by making use of Coulomb's law.

7. To study the factor on which the self-inductance of a coil depends by observing the
effect of this coil, when put in series with a resistor/(bulb) in a circuit fed up by an
A.C. source of adjustable frequency.

8. To study the earth's magnetic field using a compass needle -bar magnet by plotting
magnetic field lines and tangent galvanometer.
Practical Examination for Visually Impaired Students of
Classes XI and XII Evaluation Scheme

Time 2 hours Max. Marks: 30

Identification/Familiarity with the apparatus 5 marks


Written test (based on given/prescribed practicals) 10 marks
Practical Record 5 marks
Viva 10 marks
Total 30 marks

General Guidelines
The practical examination will be of two-hour duration.
A separate list of ten experiments is included here.
The written examination in practicals for these students will be conducted at the time
of practical examination of all other students.
The written test will be of 30 minutes duration.
The question paper given to the students should be legibly typed. It should contain
a total of 15 practical skill based very short answer type questions. A student would
be required to answer any 10 questions.
A writer may be allowed to such students as per CBSE examination rules.
All questions included in the question papers should be related to the listed practicals.
Every question should require about two minutes to be answered.
These students are also required to maintain a practical file. A student is expected to
record at least five of the listed experiments as per the specific instructions for each
subject. These practicals should be duly checked and signed by the internal
examiner.
The format of writing any experiment in the practical file should include aim,
apparatus required, simple theory, procedure, related practical skills, precautions
etc.
Questions may be generated jointly by the external/internal examiners and used for
assessment.
The viva questions may include questions based on basic theory/principle/concept,
apparatus/ materials/chemicals required, procedure, precautions, sources of error
etc.
Class XII

A. Items for Identification/ familiarity with the apparatus for assessment


in practicals (All experiments)

Meter scale, general shape of the voltmeter/ammeter, battery/power supply,


connecting wires, standard resistances, connecting wires, voltmeter/ammeter,
meter bridge, screw gauge, jockey Galvanometer, Resistance Box, standard
Resistance, connecting wires, Potentiometer, jockey, Galvanometer, Lechlanche
cell, Daniell cell [simple distinction between the two vis-à-vis their outer (glass and
copper) containers], rheostat connecting wires, Galvanometer, resistance box,
Plug-in and tapping keys, connecting wires battery/power supply, Diode, Resistor
(Wire-wound or carbon ones with two wires connected to two ends), capacitors
(one or two types), Inductors, Simple electric/electronic bell, battery/power supply,
Plug- in and tapping keys, Convex lens, concave lens, convex mirror, concave
mirror, Core/hollow wooden cylinder, insulated wire, ferromagnetic rod,
Transformer core, insulated wire.

B. List of Practicals

1. To determine the resistance per cm of a given wire by plotting a graph between


voltage and current.
2. To verify the laws of combination (series/parallel combination) of resistances by
Ohm’s law.
3. To find the resistance of a given wire / standard resistor using a meter bridge.
4. To determine the resistance of a galvanometer by half deflection method.
5. To identify a resistor, capacitor, inductor and diode from a mixed collection of
such items.
6. To observe the difference between
(i) a convex lens and a concave lens
(ii) a convex mirror and a concave mirror and to estimate the likely
difference between the power of two given convex /concave lenses.
7. To design an inductor coil and to know the effect of
(i) change in the number of turns
(ii) Introduction of ferromagnetic material as its core material on the
inductance of the coil.
8. To design a (i) step up (ii) step down transformer on a given core and know the
relation between its input and output voltages.

Note: The above practicals may be carried out in an experiential manner rather than
recording observations.

Prescribed Books:

1. Physics, Class XI, Part -I and II, Published by NCERT.

2. Physics, Class XII, Part -I and II, Published by NCERT.

3. Laboratory Manual of Physics for class XII Published by NCERT.

4. The list of other related books and manuals brought out by


NCERT (consider multimedia also).

Note:
The content indicated in NCERT textbooks as excluded for the year 2023-24 is not to
be tested by schools and will not be assessed in the Board examinations 2023-24.
QUESTION PAPER DESIGN
Theory (Class: XI/XII)
Maximum Marks: 70 Duration: 3 hrs.

S No. Typology of Questions Total Approximate


Marks Percentage
1 Remembering: Exhibit memory of previously learned 27 38 %
material by recalling facts, terms, basic concepts, and
answers.
Understanding: Demonstrate understanding of facts and
ideas by organizing, comparing, translating, interpreting,
giving descriptions, and stating main ideas

2 Applying: Solve problems to new situations by applying 22 32%


acquired knowledge, facts, techniques and rules in a
different way.
3 Analysing : Examine and break information into parts by 21 30%
identifying motives or causes. Make inferences and find
evidence to support generalizations
Evaluating:
Present and defend opinions by making judgments about
information, validity of ideas, or quality of work based on
a set of criteria.
Creating:
Compile information together in a different way by
combining elements in a new pattern or proposing
alternative solutions.
Total Marks 70 100
Practical 30
Gross Total 100
Note:
The above template is only a sample. Suitable internal variations may be made for
generating similar templates keeping the overall weightage to different form of questions
and typology of questions same.
For more details kindly refer to Sample Question Paper of class XII for the year
2023- 24 to be published by CBSE at its website.
INDEX
.
.
SL.No CHAPTER NAME PAGE NO.

1 CHAPTER: 1-ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELD 1-20

2 CHAPTER: 2 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND 21-36


CAPACITANCE

3 CHAPTER: 3- Current Electricity 37-46

4 CHAPTER:4 MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 47-62

5 CHAPTER 5: MAGNETISM AND MATTER 63-67

6 CHAPTER: 6-ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 79-92

7 CHAPTER: 7 ALTERNATING CURRENT 93-90

8 CHAPTER: 8 ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 106-112

9 CHAPTER: 9 RAY OPTICS AND OPTICAL INSTRUMENT 113-129

10 CHAPTER: 10 WAVE OPTICS 130-147

11 CHAPTER: 11 DUAL NATURE OF MATTER AND RADIATION 148-160

12 CHAPTER 12: ATOM 161-173

13 CHAPTER 13: NUCLEI 174-185

14 CHAPTER: 14 SEMICONDUCTOR ELECTRONICS: 185-205


MATERIALS,DEVICES AND SIMPLE CIRCUITS

15 ALL FORMULAS 206-219

16 ALL IMPORTANT DIAGRAMS 220-248

17 SAMPLE QUESTION PAPERS

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 1


KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN
KVS RO KOLKATA
SESSION 2023-24
STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS
CLASS-XII/XI PHYSICS
CHAPTER: 1-ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELD

Q CORE CONCEPT/ QUESTION M


NO FOCUSED-FORMULA/ A
TARGETED THEOREM R
K

SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)


1. SI. UNIT What is the S.I. unit of Electric Flux? 1
(a)Nm2C-1 (b) NmC2 (c) NCm-1 (d) NmC-1
2. FORMULA Electric field intensity due to a short dipole remains directly proportional to 1
E=K (r → distance of a point from centre of dipole )
(a) r 2 (b) r -2 (c) r 3 (d) r -3
3. E=0 Inside a hollow charged The value of electric field inside a conducting sphere having radius R and 1
sphere charge Q will be :
(a) KQ/R2 (b) KQ/R (c) KQ2/R2 (d) Zero
4. For a point charge, the graph between electric field versus distance is given 1
by : -
E∞

Concept of charge enclosed Charge Q is kept in a sphere of 5 cm first then it is kept in a cube of side 5 1
5. cm., the outgoing flux will be –
(a)More in case of sphere (b)More in case of cube (c)Same in both cases
(d)Incomplete information
6. Concept of charge enclosed What is the electric flux through a cube of side 1 cm which encloses an 1
electric dipole?
(a)1/4π€0 (b) 4π€0 (c)Zero (d)1/€0
7. Q= n e The quantisation of charge indicates that 1
n- no of electrons (a)Charge, which is a fraction of charge on an electron, is not possible (b)A
charge cannot be destroyed (c) Charge exists on particles (d)There exists a
minimum permissible charge on a particle
8. Concept of charge enclosed The total flux through the faces of the cube with side of length ‗a‘ if a charge 1
q is placed at corner A of the cube is

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 2


9. Concept of Dipole A charge Q is placed at the centre of the line joining two point charges +q 1
and +q as shown in the figure. To maintain equilibrium of the system, the
ratio of charges Q and q is

(a) 4
(b) 1/4
(c) -4
(d) -1/4
10. Concept of electric Filed The force per unit charge is known as 1
(a) electric flux
(b) electric field
(c) electric potential
(d) electric current
11. Concept of electric Filed Electric field lines provide information about 1
(a) field strength
(b) direction
(c) nature of charge
(d) all of these
12. SI UNIT The unit of electric dipole moment is 1
(a) newton
(b) coulomb
(c) farad
(d) debye
13. Concept of Dielectric What is the dielectric constant of a metal? 1
Material
a. -1
b. 0
c. 1
d. Infinite

14. Concept of electric Flux and A sphere balloon having radius of 5cm. encloses a total of +3 C charges. 1
charge enclosed Then more amount of air is filled inside it to increase its radius up to 10 cm.
Calculate the ratio of electric flux passing through the balloon in the two
cases.
(a) 1:2 (b) 2:1 (c) 1:1 (d) 3:1
15. Concept of electric Flux and What is the electric flux through a cylinder with radius R and length L, kept
charge enclosed in a uniform electric field E which is parallel to the cylindrical axis,
(a) πE2RL (b) 2πRLE (c) πR2LE (d) Zero
SECTION-B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: 1
(Qn. No. 16-20)
Assertion: (A) 1
Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS
GIVEN IN ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct
explanation of A.
b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct
explanation of A.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 3


c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.

16. Assertion (A) : If a proton and an electron are placed in the same uniform 1
electric field, they experience different acceleration.
Reason (R) : Electric force on a test charge is independent of its mass.
17. Assertion (A) : The charge given to a metallic sphere does not depend on 1
whether it is hollow or solid.
Reason (R) : Since the charge resides only on the surface of the
conductor.
18. Assertion (A) : A metallic shield in form of a hollow shell may be built to 1
block an electric field.
Reason (R) : In a hollow spherical shield, the electric field inside it is
zero at every point.
19. Assertion (A) : The tyres of aircraft are slightly conducting. 1
Reason (R) : If a conductor is connected to ground, the extra charge
induced on conductor will flow to ground.
20. Assertion (A) : On bringing a positively charged rod near the uncharged 1
conductor, the conductor gets attracted towards the rod.
Reason (R) : The electric field lines of the charged rod are
perpendicular to the surface of conductor.
SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING
QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)
21. KE of Charged Particle A particle of mass ‗m‘ and charge ‗q‘ is placed at rest in a uniform electric 1
field ‗E‘ and then released. The kinetic energy attained by the particle after
moving a distance ‗y‘ is
(a) qEy2 (b) qE2y (c) qEy (d) q2Ey

22 Force on electric Dipole Figure here shows electric field lines in which an electric dipole p is placed 1
as shown. Which of the following statements is correct?
(a) The dipole will not experience any force.
(b) The dipole will experience a force towards right.
(c) The dipole will experience a force towards left.
(d) The dipole will experience a force upwards.

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-


29)
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26]
23. Concept of electric field A point charge +Q is placed in the vicinity of a conducting surface. Trace the 2
field lines between the charge and the conducting surface.
24. Concept of electric field Two-point charges 4Q and Q are separated by 1 m in air. At what point on 2
the line joining the charges is the electric field intensity zero?
25. Electric field & Flux Define electric flux. Write its SI unit. 2
A charge ‗q‘ is enclosed by a spherical surface of radius ‗R‘. If the radius is
reduced to half, how would the electric flux through the surface change?
26. τ=pXE An electric dipole is placed in an uniform electric field. Derive an expression 2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 4


= p Esinθ for the torque experienced by it.
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING
OUTCOME OF THE CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]
27. Gauss Theorem- A thin straight infinitely long conducting wire having charge density ‗λ‘ is 2
Application enclosed by a cylindrical surface of radius r and length ‗l‘ , its coinciding
with the length of the wire. Find the expression for the electric flux through
the surface of the cylinder.
28. Gauss Theorem- The electric field components in Figure are Ex=  x1/2, Ey= Ez= 0, in which 2
Application
 = 800 N/C m1/2. Calculate
(a) The flux through the cube, and
(b) The charge within the cube. Assume that a = 0.1 m.

29. Gauss Theorem- Using Gauss‘s law, show mathematically that the electric field for any point 2
Application outside a uniformly charged spherical shell is same as the entire charge
concentrated at the centre of the shell.
SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (Qn. No. 30-36)
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33)
30. It is given that ‗λ‘ be the linear charge density of a uniformly charged and 3
infinitely long straight conductor. If ‗r‘ be the distance of a point from this
conductor then mathematically show that the electric field at the given point
due to this conductor depends on both ‗λ‘ & ‗r‘. Hence plot a graph between
electric field (E) and distance (r).

31. 3

A point charge of +10 µC is placed just above the


centre of the given square surface as shown in the figure. Calculate the total
electric flux passing through the surface.

32. Use Gauss‘s law to derive the expression for the electric field in all the three 3
regions formed due to the placement of nearby two uniformly charged
parallel sheets with surface charge densities +σ1 and – σ2 respectively.
Hence, discuss the electric field in the same region, if = =

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 5


33. Consider two hollow concentric spheres, S1 and S2, enclosing charges 2Q 3
and 4Q respectively as shown in the figure. (i) Find out the ratio of the
electric flux through them. (ii) How will the electric flux through the sphere
S1 change if a medium of dielectric constant ′ϵr′ is introduced in the space
inside S1 in place of air? Deduce the necessary expression.

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING


OUTCOME OF THE CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)
34. Derive an expression for the electric field due to a short dipole at a point 3
lying on its equatorial line.

35. Consider a uniform electric field E = 3×103 i NC-1. 3


(a) What is the flux of this field through a square of 10 cm on a side whose
plane is parallel to the yz-plane?
(b) What is the flux through the same square if the normal to its plane makes
a 60o angle with the x-axis?
36. Two small identical electric dipoles AB and CD, each of dipole moment P 3
are kept at an angle of 120o to each other in an external electric field E
pointing along the x-axis as shown in the figure. Find the

(a)Dipole moment of the arrangement, and


(b)Magnitude and direction of the net torque acting on it.
SECTION-F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (Qn. No. 37-38)
37. When electric dipole is placed in uniform electric field, its two charges 4
experience equal and opposite forces, which cancel each other and hence net
force on electric dipole in uniform electric field is zero. However these
forces are not collinear, so they give rise to some torque on the dipole. Since
net force on electric dipole in uniform electric field is zero, so no work is
done in moving the electric dipole in uniform electric field. However, some
work is done in rotating the dipole against the torque acting on it.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 6


1. The dipole moment of a dipole in a uniform external field Ē is P. Then
the torque τ acting on the dipole is
(a) τ = P x E (b) τ = P. Ē (c) τ = 2(P + Ē) (d) τ = (P + E)
2. An electric dipole consists of two opposite charges, each of magnitude
1.0 μC separated by a distance of 2.0 cm. The dipole is placed in an
external field of 105 NC-1 . The maximum torque on the dipole is
(a) 0.2 × 10-3 Nm (b) 1×10-3 Nm (c) 2 × 10-3 Nm (d) 4 × 10-3 Nm
3. Torque on a dipole in a uniform electric field is minimum when θ is
equal to
(a) 0° (b) 90° (c) 180° (d) Both (a) and (c)
4. When an electric dipole is held at an angle in a uniform electric field,
the net force F and torque τ on the dipole are
(a) F= 0, τ = 0 (b) F≠0, τ≠0 (c) F=0, τ ≠ 0 (d) F≠0, τ=0
5. An electric dipole of moment p is placed in an electric field of
intensity E. The dipole acquires a position such that the axis of the
dipole makes an angle with the direction of the field. Assuming that
potential energy of the dipole to be zero when θ = 90°, the torque
and the potential energy of the dipole will respectively be
(a) pEsinθ, - pEcosθ (b) pEsinθ, -2pEcosθ (c) pEsinθ, 2pEcosθ
(d) pEcosθ, -pEsinθ
38. Electric field strength is proportional to the density of lines of force i.e., 4
electric field strength at a point is proportional to the number of lines of force
cutting a unit area element placed normal to the field at that point. As
illustrated in given figure, the electric field at P is stronger than at Q.

(i) Electric lines of force about a positive point charge are


(a) radially outwards
(b) circular clockwise
(c) radially inwards
(d) parallel straight lines

(ii) Which of the following is false for electric lines of force?


(a) They always start from positive charge and terminate on negative
charges.
(b) They are always perpendicular to the surface of a charged conductor.
(c) They always form closed loops.
(d) They are parallel and equally spaced in a region of uniform electric field.

(iii) Which one of the following patterns of electric line of force is not
possible in field due to stationary charges?
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 7
(iv) Electric field lines are curved
(a) in the field of a single positive or negative charge
(b) in the field of two equal and opposite charges.
(c) in the field of two like charges.
(d) both (b) and (c)

(v) The figure below shows the electric field lines due to two positive
charges. The magnitudes EA, EB and EC of the electric fields at point A, B
and C respectively are related as

(a) EA > EB > EC


(b) EB > EA > EC
(c) EA = EB > EC
(d) EA > EB = EC

SECTION-G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)


39. (i) Derive an expression for the electric field intensity at a point on the 5
axial line of an electric dipole of dipole moment ‗p‘ and length
‗2d‘.What is the direction of this field?
(ii) Two charges of magnitudes – 2Q and + Q are located at points (a, 0)
and (4a, 0) respectively. What is the electric flux due to these charges
through a sphere of radius ‗3a‘ with its centre at the origin?
40. (i) A thin conducting spherical shell of radius ‗R‘ has charge ‗Q‘ spread 5
uniformly over its surface. Using Gauss‘s theorem, derive an
expression for the electric field at a point outside the shell. Draw a
graph of electric field E(r) with distance r from the centre of the shell
for 0 ≤ r ≤∞.
(ii) A thin metallic spherical shell of radius R carries a charge Q on its
surface. A point charge Q 2 is placed at the centre C and another
charge +2Q is placed outside the shell at A at a distance x from the
centre as shown in the figure. (i) Find the electric flux through the
shell. (ii) Find the force on the charges at the centre ‗C‘ of the shell
and at the point ‗A‘.

------------------------XXXXXXXXXXXXXX------------------

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 8


Sl no. Important Video link [OPTIONAL]
1
2
3

Sl no. Important Facts/ information you like to share


OR [OPTIONAL]
Short cut Tips
1
2
3

ANSWER KEY:
Q.NO. Answer MARK
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]
1 (a)Nm2C-1; Electric Flux given by, Φ = E.A (NC-1m2) 1

2 (d) r-3 1
; As electric field due to a short dipole is given by E = (1/4π€0) × p/r3

3 (d) Zero; As per Gauss‘s law, electric flux is given by Φ = qnet /€0 and as we know 1
that no net charge will reside on the interior part of the conducting sphere.
4 (b) 1

As we know that electric field due to a point charge is given by,

E = (1/4π€0) × (q/r2 ), i.e. E ∝ /r2

5 (c)Same in both cases; as Gauss‘s law tells that electric flux does not depend upon 1
the area or shape of the closed structure. (i.e. Φ = qnet /€0)
6 (c) zero; because net charge of an electric dipole is always zero. ( Φ = qnet /€0) 1
7 Charge, which is a fraction of charge on an electron, is not possible. As we know 1
that
q=
= 𝑁
8 The given cubical structure can be considered as one-eighth (1/8 th) part of a bcc 1
type crystal structure. So, total flux passing through the entire bcc type crystal
structure can be considered as equal to q/€0 by assuming the point charge to be
located at the centre of such a crystal structure. Hence 1/8 th of this value i.e. q/8€0
amount of flux will be passing through the given cubical structure.
9 (d)-1/4; For equilibrium of the system, net force acting on either of the two point 1
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 9
charges, q should be equal to zero, i.e. KQq/𝑥2 + Kq2/4𝑥2 = 0
10 (b) electric field; by the definition of electric field. 1

11 (d) all of these 1

12 (d) debye or Coulomb-metre. (As, p = q × 2l) 1


13 (d) Infinite; because dielectric constant, €r = Fvacuum/Fmedium 1

or Evacuum/Emedium and inside a metal, electric field is always zero. (i.e. here
Emedium = 0)
14 (c) 1 : 1; as Gauss‘s law tells that electric flux does not depend upon the area or 1
shape of the closed structure. (i.e. Φ = qnet /€0)
15 (d) Zero ; Flux through surface A, 1
2
ϕA = E × πR
ΦB = −E × πR2
Flux through curved surface, C = ∫E.ds
= ∫Edscos900 = 0
∴ Total flux through cylinder = ϕA + ϕB + ϕC = 0

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)


16 (b) ; Electric force on a charge is given by ‗F‘ = qE and its acceleration is given 1
by ‗a‘ = F/m , m = mass of the charged particle, q = charge of the charged particle .
Here charge of both of the particles is same, electric field is also same, but their
masses are different. Hence force acting on them will be same but acceleration will
be different.
17 (a)The charge given to a metallic sphere does not depend on whether it is hollow or 1
solid. This is because whatever amount of charge given to the metallic conductor
whether it is hollow or solid, it always resides on the surface of that conductor.
From gauss‘s law:

∮E.ds = €0 q

If there is no electric field inside conductor than there should be no charge inside
sphere.

18 (a)In any metallic shield, due to the electric field the electric charge will be induced in 1
such a way that the combination of the negative charge and the positive charge gives the
net electric charge equal to zero. As a result at any point the electric field is zero. Hence,
the metallic field in the form of the hollow shell is built to block an electric field.
Therefore, both the Assertion and the Reason are true and reason is the correct
explanation of assertion.
19 (a)During take off and landing, the friction between tyres and the run way may 1
cause electrification of tyres. Due to conducting to a ground, all the electric charges
accumulated over the tyres easily flow to the ground and hence sparking is
avoided.

20 (b)Though the net charge on the conductor is still zero but due to induction the 1
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 10
negatively charged region is nearer to the rod as compared to the positively
charged region. That is why the conductor gets attracted towards the rod

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS:


(QN NO 21-22)
21 (c) 1
K.E acquired = work done
= force× distance = qE × y = qEy
22 (c)The dipole will experience a force towards left. 1
Spacing between electric lines of force increases from left to right. This
shows, E on left is greater than E on right. Therefore, force on +q charge of
dipole placed to the right is smaller as compared to the force on −q charge
of dipole which is placed to the left. Hence the dipole will experience a net
force towards the left.

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)


23 2

Electric lines of force always terminate normally to the surface of the conductor.
24 Electric field somewhere in between will be 0 , Let ‗x' be the distance of the point 2
from Q, then (1-x) from 4Q. Now electric fields at this point due to two point

charges are equal.

KQ/x2 = k.4Q/(1−x)2
Solving will give x =1/3 from the charge q.

25 Electric flux is defined as the measure of count of number of electric field lines 2
crossing an area.
Electric flux ϕ = EA cosθ
SI unit of electric flux is Nm2/C
When R is reduced to half, electric flux through the surface remains the same. This
is because electric flux through the closed surface depends only on the charge
enclosed by it not on its shape

26 Let AB be an electric dipole of charges -q and +q and distance between them be 2l. 2
Dipole makes an angle θ in the electric field E in the direction of field.
Force on the charge +q due to electric field is given by F = qE Due to both forces

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 11


are equal and opposite.
Hence resultant force is zero, but they from a couple. Therefore, moment of
restoring couple or torque is given by
∴ τ = force x perpendicular distance = qE x BC BC = AB sinθ = 2l sinθ
∴ τ = qE x 2l sinθ = pE sinθ (∵p = q x 2l), where p is electric dipole moment.

27 Given that a thin straight infinitely long wire has a linear charge density λ. The 2
electric field will be radial and perpendicular to the wire for this kind of
configuration. On the flat surface of the cylinder, there will be no flux through the
surface. The electric field (E) will remain constant at any point on the curved
surface of the cylinder (as all points on it are equidistant from the wire) and
perpendicular to it.

To find the electric flux through the cylinder, we use Gauss‘s law. The charge
enclosed by the cylinder λ × l, as l is the length of the cylinder and it is also the
length of the charged wire within the cylinder. The charge is distributed uniformly
on a thin straight conducting wire. Let q be the charge enclosed by the cylindrical
surface.

Linear charge density,


λ = ql
q = λl.......(i)
Gauss‘s Theorem states that
Electric Flux = Net charge enclosed /€0
Total electric flux through the surface of cylinder
ϕ = q/€0 [∵Gauss's Theorem]
∴ϕ = λl€0
28 Given : Ey = Ex = 0, 2
Ex=αx1/2
α = 800 N/Cm1/2
a = 0.1 m
Here , electric field has only x component .
At the left face , x = a .
So , magnitude of the electric field on this face is
Eleft = αa1/2
At the right face, x = 2a
So magnitude of the electric field on this face is
Eright = α(2)1/2 = √2 αa1/2
As both the electric fields , Eleft and Eright , are directed in opposite directions to
each other, i.e. towards ˆnL and ˆnR , therefore net flux through the cube is given
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 12
as
ϕ = ϕ right − ϕleft
or, ϕ = ( Eright) (area of the right face ) - (Eleft) (area of the left face )
or, ϕ = (√2 αa1/2(a2) − (αa1/2)(a2)
or, ϕ = α5/2(√2 −1)
= (800 N/Cm1/2)(0.1)5/2(√2 −1)
This gives ϕ =1.05 Nm2C−1
we know ϕ = q/€0
⇒ q = 1.05 x 8.85 x 10-12 = 9.303 X 10-12 C

29 Electric field intensity at a point outside a uniformly charged thin spherical shell: 2
Consider a uniformly charged than spherical shell of radius R carrying charge Q.
To find the electric field outside the shell. We consider a spherical Gaussian
surface of radius r(>R), concentric with given shell. If E be the electric field
outside the shell, then by symmetry electric field strength has same magnitude E0
on the Gaussian surface and is directed radially outward. Also the directions of
normal at each point radially outward, so angle between E and dS is zero at each
point
Hence, electric flux through Gaussian surface.
∮S = E0 ⋅ dS
∮ = E0 dS cos0 = E0 × 4πr2
Now, Gaussian surface is outside the given charged shell, so charge enclosed by
Gaussian surface is Q.
Hence, by Gauss's theorem , we have Total Flux , Φ = net charge enclosed/ϵ0
⇒ E0 × 4πr2 = Q/ϵ0 ⇒ E0 = (1/4πϵ0) × (Q/r2)
Thus, electric field outside a charged thin spherical shell is the same as if the whole
charge Q is concentrated at the centre.

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)


30 Electric field due to an infinitely long straight uniformly charged wire : 3
Consider an uniformly charged wire of infinite length having a constant linear
charge density λ (Charge per unit length). Let P be a point at a distance r from the
wire and E be the electric field at the point P. A cylinder of length l, radius r,
closed at each end by plane caps normal to the axis is chosen as Gaussian surface.
Consider a very small area ds on the Gaussian surface. By symmetry, the
magnitude of the electric field will be the same at all points on the curved surface
of the cylinder and directed radially outward. E and ds are along the same
direction.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 13


The electric flux (ϕ) through curved surface = ∮Eds cosθ
ϕ = ∮Eds [θ = 0; cosθ=1]
= E(2πrl) [The surface area of the curved part is 2πrl] since E and ds are right
angles to each other; the electric flux through the plane caps =0.
∴ Total flux through the Gaussian surface, ϕ = E(2πrl). The net charge enclosed by
Gaussian surface is, q = λl
∴ By Gauss's law,
= E(2πrl) = λl/∈0 or E = λ/2πr∈0
The direction of electric field E is radially outward, if line charge is positive and
inward, if the line charge is negative.

31 The square can be considered as one face of a cube of edge 10 cm with a centre 3
where charge q is placed. According to Gauss‘s theorem for a cube, total electric
flux is through all its six faces.

Hence, electric flux through one face of the cube i.e., through the square,

Where,
∈0 = Permittivity of free space

= 8.854 × 10−12 N−1C2 m−2

q = 10 μC = 10 × 10−6 C

= 1.88 × 105 N m2 C−1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 14


Therefore, electric flux through the square is 1.88 × 105 N m2 C−1.

32 3

As shown here,
= 0; as = ; Similarly, = / 0 and =0
33 (i) We have to find the ratio of electric flux through them. 3
So, from Gauss law, flux through a surface is equal to
So, electric flux passing through sphere S1
ϕ1 = 2Q/€0
And, electric flux passing through sphere S2
ϕ2 = (2Q + 4Q)/€0 = 6Q/€0
∴ Ratio of flux through S1 and S2 is
ϕ1/ϕ2 = (2Q × €0)/ (6Q × €0)
⇒ ϕ1/ϕ2 = 1/3
(ii) Now, we have to find the electric flux through sphere S1 if a medium of
dielectric constant 'εr' is introduced in space inside S1 in place of air.
Using Gauss theorem,
ϕ1=∮E.dS
=2Q/€0
Now when a material with dielectric constant εr is introduced then, εr = ε/ε0
Now, flux through S1 is ϕ1 ′ = 2Q/ε
But ε = εrε0
Where ε= permittivity of medium
ε0= permittivity of air
So, ϕ1′ = 2Q/εrε0
But 2Q/ε0 = ϕ1
So, ϕ1′ = ϕ1/εr
So, now flux is reduced εr times when placed in a dielectric medium of dielectric
constant εr .

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 15


34 3
Electric field at A due to the charges q and −q is shown in the above figure.
We resolve E into horizontal and vertical components. The vertical
components (E sinθ) cancel out each other and only the horizontal
components survive to give net electric field at A as 2Ecosθ.
Electric field at point A, EA = 2Ecosθ
where E = q/4πϵ0 (r2 + a2)
We get EA = 2q/4πϵ0 (r2 + a2) cosθ
From figure, we have cosθ = a/ r2 + a2)
∴ EA = 2qa/4πϵ0 (r2 + a2)3/2
We know dipole moment P = 2qa
⟹ EA = P/4πϵ0 (r2 + a2)3/2

For a<<r, we can neglect a2 compared to r2.


⟹ EA = P/4πϵ0r3

35 (a) Electric field intensity, E = 3×103 N/C 3


Magnitude of electric field intensity, ∣E∣ = 3×103 N/C
Side of the square, s =10 cm = 0.1m
Area of the square, A = s2 = 0.01m2
The plane of the square is parallel to the y-z plane. Hence, angle between the unit
vector normal to the plane and electric field, θ = 0o
Flux (ϕ) through the plane is given by the relation,
Φ = ∣E∣Acosθ
= 3×103×0.01×cos0o
=30 Nm2/C

(b) Plane makes an angle of 60o with the x-axis. Hence, θ = 60o
Flux, ϕ = ∣E∣Acosθ
= 3×103×0.01×cos60o
= 30×1/2 = 15 Nm2/C

36 The two dipoles are placed at an angle of 120o 3


The dipole moment of AB is directed towards B
and that of cd is directed towards c
Hence,
the resultant dipole moment is given as
R = P2 + P2 + 2PPcos120o)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 16


= 2P2 −2P2/2) = P

when the system is subjected to an electric field ,there is a torque


acting on the dipole.
The field is directed towards X-axis . The angle COR in the
above diagram will be 60o.
Hence, the angle between the resultant dipole moment and electric field
is 90o− 60o = 30o
∴ torque on the system is
Ʈ = PEsinθ = PEsin30o = PE/2
The direction of torque is perpendicular to both P and E.

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)


37 1.(a) τ = P x E ; 4
2.(c) 2 × 10-3 Nm (As maximum torque is given by, τmax = PE ,
Sinθ max. value = 1)
3.(a) 0o; Torque = PE sinθ and sinθ has minimum value equal to 0, for θ = 0o
4.
(c) F = 0, τ ≠ 0 ; As from figure, it is clear that under the given condition two equal,
opposite and parallel forces begin to act on the dipole forming a couple and due to
this couple a torque is generated on the dipole. But at the same time we notice
that the two equal and opposite forces also act on the dipole making thereby
net force equal to zero.

5. (a) pE sinθ, - pE cosθ ; Torque = pE sinθ and potential energy of the


dipole = - P . E = -pE cosθ

38 1.(a) radially outwards ; because if we allow a unit positive test charge to move 4
freely on placing nearby a positive point charge, it will continue to move
along the straight line path as shown by the diagram.
2. (c) They always form closed loops; because if we place a positive test charge in
between the space of two point charges of the given dipole then it will
always move along the direction as shown by the line of force here.

3. because stationary charges can never form closed loops.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 17


4. (d) both (b) and (c)

5. (c)EA = EB > EC

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)


39 (i) 5

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 18


Electric field due to an electric dipole at a point on its axial line: AB is an
electric dipole of two point charges −q and +q separated by small distance
2d. P is a point along the axial line of the dipole at a distance r from the
midpoint O of the electric dipole.
The electric field at the point P due to +q placed at B is,
E1 = q/4πε0 (r − d)2 (along BP)
The electric field at the point P due to −q placed at A is,
E2 = q/4πε0 (r + d)2 (along PA)
Therefore, the magnitude of resultant electric field (E) acts in the direction of the
vector with a greater, magnitude. The resultant electric field at P is
E = E1 + (−E2)
E = [q/4πε0 (r − d)2 − q/4πε0 (r + d)2] along BP
E = 2pr/4πε0 (r2 – d2)2 along BP
If the point P is far away from the dipole, then d≪r
∴ E = (2p/4πε0) x 1/r3 along BP [∵ Electric dipole moment p = q × 2d]
E acts in the direction of dipole moment.

(ii) By Gauss's law, the flux ϕ = Qenclosed/ε0


Here the charge enclosed by sphere of radius 3a is Qenclosed = −2Q
Thus, ϕ = −2Q/ε0

40 (i) Electric field inside the shell (hollow charged conducting sphere) : To find the 5
electric field inside the shell, we consider a spherical Gaussian surface of radius r
(>R) concentric with the given shell. If ‗E‘
be the electric field inside the shell, then by symmetry electric field strength has the
same magnitude ‗E0‘ on the Gaussian surface and is directed radially outward. Also
the directions of normal at each point is radially outward, so the angle between E0
and dS is zero at each point.
Hence, electric flux through Gaussian surface
dϕ = E0.dS = E0dScos0o

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 19


∫ = E0 ∫ = E0 x 4πr2
Now, Gaussian surface is outside the given charged shell, so charge enclosed by
Gaussian surface is Q.
Hence, by Gauss's theorem ϕTotal = (1/ϵ0) × charge enclosed
⇒ E0 x 4πr2 = (1/ϵ)×Q ⇒ E0 = (1/4πϵ0)/(Q/r2)

(ii) Electric field inside the shell (hollow charged conducting sphere) : To find the
electric field inside the shell, we consider a spherical Gaussian surface of radius
r(<R) concentric with the given shell. If ‗E‘
be the electric field inside the shell, then by symmetry electric field strength has the
same magnitude E on the Gaussian surface and is directed radially outward. Also
the directions of normal at each point is radially outward, so angle between E
and dS
is zero at each point.
Hence, electric flux through Gaussian surface
= ∫ E . dS = ∫ o

= ∫E dScos00 = E × 4πr2
Now, Gaussian surface is inside the given charged shell, so charge
enclosed by Gaussian surface is zero.
Hence, by Gauss's theorem
∫ E . dS = (1/ϵ0) × charge enclosed
⇒ E ×4πr2 = (1/ϵ0) × 0 ⇒ Ei = 0

Thus, electric field at each point inside a charged thin spherical shell is zero. The
graph is shown in fig.

(i) Electric flux through a Gaussian surface, υ = Total enclosed charge/ϵ0


Net charge enclosed inside the shell, qnet = Q + Q/2 = 3Q/2
∴ Electric flux through the shell = 3Q/2ϵ0
(ii)We know that electric field or net charge inside the spherical conducting shell is
zero. Hence, the force on charge Q/2 is zero.
Now the force on the charge placed at A , is given by
FA = (1/4πϵ0) × [(Q + Q/2) 2Q]/𝑥2 = (1/4πϵ0)×(3Q2/𝑥2)

<---------------------------------------xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx------------------------------------>

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 20


KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

KVS RO KOLKATA

SESSION 2023-24

STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS

CLASS-XII/XI PHYSICS

CHAPTER: 2 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND


CAPACITANCE

Q CORE QUESTION M
NO. CONCEPT/ A
FOCUSED- R
FORMULA/ K
TARGATED
THEOREM

SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)

1 Electric Work done by an external force in bringing a unit positive charge from infinity 1
potential to a point is
(a) electric energy at that point
(b) electrostatic potential at that point
(c) equipotential surface at that point
(d) capacitance at that point
2 Formula of The potential at a point P due to the charge Q is 1
electric
(a) Q/4πε0r
potential
(b) Q/4πε0r2
(c) Q/2πε0r

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 21


(d) Q2/4πε0r
3 Use of What is the potential at a point P due to a charge of 4 x 10-7 C located 9 cm 1
formula of away?
potential
(a) 9 x 109 V
(b) 4 x 109 V
(c) 4 x 10-9 V
(d) 4 x 104 V
4 Electric field Relation between electric field and electric potential V is 1
& potential
(a) E = dV/dr
(b) E = - dV/dr
(c) E = dV x dr
(d) E = -dV x dr
5 Dimensional Dimensional formula of potential difference is 1
analysis
(a) [ML2 T-2 A-1]
(b) [ML2 T-3 A-1]
(c) [ML T-2 A]
(d) [ML2 T3 A-2]
6 Graph Variation of electric potential due to a point charge q < 0 with 1/r (r is 1
distance from point charge ) is shown by

7 capacitance A dielectric slab (thick plate of dielectric) is placed between the plates of a 1
parallel plate capacitor. Its capacitance
(a) Becomes zero
(b) remains same
(c) decreases
(d) increases
8 Dimensional Dimensional formula of capacitance is 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 22


analysis (a) [M-1 L-2 T4 A2]
(b) [ML-2 T4 A2]
(c) [M-1 L2 T-4 A2]
(d) [M L-2 T-4 A-2]
9 Potential Potential energy (U) of a dipole in a uniform external field is 1
energy
(a) ⃗. ⃗⃗

(b) ⃗ 𝑥 ⃗⃗

(c) – ⃗ 𝑥 ⃗⃗

(d) - ⃗. ⃗⃗
10 Electrostatic Inside a conductor, electrostatic field is 1
of conductor
(a) zero
(b) non-zero
(c) cannot calculated
(d) increases from centre to circumference
11 Equipotential If a unit positive charge is taken from one point to another over an 1
surface equipotential surface, then
(a) work is done on the charge
(b) work is done by the charge
(c) work done is constant
(d) no work is done
12 U = ½ CV2 In the capacitor of capacitance C, charge Q and energy W is stored. If the 1
charge is increased upto 2Q, the energy stored will be
Q = CV
(a) W/4
(b) W/2
(c) 2W
(d) 4 W
13 εr = Cm/C0 The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with air a medium is 6 µF. With
the introduction of a dielectric medium, the capacitance becomes 30μF. The
permittivity of the medium is (ε0 = 8.85 x 10-12C2 N-1 m²)
ε = εr ε0
(a) 0.44 x 10-13 C2 N-1 m-2
(b) 1·77 x 10-12 C2 N-1 m-2
(c) 0.44 x 10-10 C2 N-1 m-2
(d) 5.00 C2 N-1 m-2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 23


14 E = -dV/dr In a certain region of space with volume 0.2m³, the electric potential is found 1
to be 5V throughout. The magnitude of electric field in this region is
(a) zero
(b) 0.5 N/C
(c) 1 N/C
(d) 5 N/C
15 Dielectrics & Polar molecules are the molecules: 1
Polarisation
(a) having zero dipole moment
(b) acquire a dipole moment only in the presence of electric field due to
displacement of charges.
(c) acquire a dipole moment only when magnetic field is absent.
(d) having a permanent electric dipole moment.
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20) 1

Assertion: (A). 1

Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS GIVEN
IN ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct explanation
of A.
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.
16 Relation Assertion (A): Electric field is always normal to equipotential surfaces and 1
between field along the direction of decreasing order of potential.
& potential
Reason (R): Negative gradient of electric potential is electric field.
17 capacitor Assertion: A parallel plate capacitor is connected across battery through a 1
key. A dielectric slab of dielectric constant K is introduced between the
plates. The energy which is stored becomes K times.
Reason: The surface density of charge on the plate remains constant or
unchanged.
18 Formula of Assertion: If the distance between parallel plates of a capacitor is halved and 1
capacitance dielectric constant is made three times, then the capacitance becomes 6
times.
Reason: Capacitance of the capacitor does not depend upon the nature of
the material
19 Electric Assertion: Electric potential of earth is taken zero. 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 24


potential Reason: No electric field exists on earth surface.
20 properties of Assertion: Work done in moving a charge between any two points in a 1
field uniform electric field is independent of the path followed by the charge,
between these points,
Reason: Electrostatic forces are non-conservative.
SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 V = kq/r The two graphs drawn here, show the variation of electrostatic potential (V) 1
with 1/r (r being distance of the field point from point charge) for two-point
charges q1 and q2.
Which of the two charges has a larger magnitude and why?

22 C = ε0A/d What is the area of plates needed to have C = 1F for a separation of 1 cm? 1

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26]

23 Equipotential Two charges 2 μC and -2 μC are placed at points A and B 6 cm apart. 2


surface &
(a) Identify an equipotential surface of the system.
field
(b) What is the direction of the electric field at every point on this surface?
24 Electric flux A cube of side 20 cm is kept in a region as shown. An electric field ⃗⃗ exists in 2
the region such that the potential at a point is given by V = 10x + 5 where V is
in volt and ‘x’ is in m. Find

(i) Electric field ⃗⃗ , and


(ii) total electric flux through the cube.

25 E =- dV/dr Obtain the relation between electric field and electric potential. 2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 25


26 Equipotential What are equipotential surfaces? Draw equipotential surfaces for 2
surfaces
(a) unit positive charge
(b) uniform electric field, and
(c) two equal and opposite charges.
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF THE
CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]

27 U = q1 V(r1) + Obtain potential energy of a system of two charges q1 and q2 located at r1 2


q2 V(r2) + and r2 respectively in an external field E.
k q1 q2/r12
28 The given graph shows the variation of charge q versus potential difference V 2

C = q/V
for two capacitors C1 and C2. The two capacitors have same plate separation
but the plate area of C2 is double than that of C₁. Which of the lines in the
graph corresponds to C1 and C2 and why?
C = ε0A/d

29 Φ = Q/ε0 Using Gauss law, show that electric field inside a conductor is zero. 2

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33)

30 C= ε0A/(d- Derive an expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor of plate 3
t+t/K) area ‘A’ filled with dielectric slab of thickness ‘t’ (t < d), where d is the
distance between parallel plates.
31 V=Kp/r2 Deduce the expression for electric potential due to an electric dipole at any 3
point on its axis.
32 u= ½ ε0E2 Derive an expression for energy density in case of a parallel plate capacitor. 3
Give its SI unit and dimensional formula.
33 V = kq/r Two charges 4 × 109 C and -3 × 109 C are located at 0.1 m apart. At what point 3
on the line joining the two charges is the electric potential zero? Take
potential at infinity to be zero.
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF THE
CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)

34 C = Kε0A/d A parallel plate capacitor with air in between the plates has a capacitance of 3
8 pF. The separation between the plates is now reduced to half and space
between them is filled with a medium of dielectric constant 5. Calculate the
value of capacitance in the second case.
35 C = ε0A/d A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is charged to a potential V by a 3
battery. Without disconnecting the battery, the distance between the plates

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 26


is tripled and dielectric medium of K = 10 is introduced between plates of
capacitor. Explain giving reason how will the following be affected?
(i) Capacitance of capacitor
(ii) Charge on capacitor
(iii) Energy density of capacitor
36 1/Cs = 1/C1 + Two identical capacitors of 12 pF each are connected in series across a 3
1/C2 battery of 50 V. How much electrostatic energy is stored in the combination?
U = ½ CV2 If these were connected in parallel across the same battery, how much
energy will be stored in the combination now?
Q = CV
Also, find the charge drawn from the battery in each case.
Cp = C1 + C2

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 Equipotential Surfaces 4

Equipotential surfaces are those surfaces at every point of which the


potential is same. For various charge systems, the equipotential surfaces are
represented by curves and lines of force by full line curves. The potential
difference between two adjacent equipotential surfaces is constant. The
equipotential surfaces of a single point charge are concentric spherical shells
having their centres at point charge. Since the lines of force point radially
outwards, so they are perpendicular to equipotential surfaces at all points.

(i) How much work is done in carrying a charge qo once round a circle of
radius r with charge q at centre?
(ii) Draw the equipotential surfaces for two identical positive charge?
(iii) Why two equipotential surfaces never intersect?
Or
(iii) No work is done in moving the text charge over an equipotential surface.
Why?

38 Polarisation of Dielectric 4

When an insulator is placed in an external field, the dipoles become aligned.


Induced surface charges on the insulator establish a polarisation field Ei in its
interior. The net field E in the insulator is the vector sum of Eo and Ei as
shown in the figure.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 27


On the application of external electric field, the effect of aligning the electric
dipoles in the insulator is called polarisation and the field Ei is known as the
polarisation field.
The dipole moment per unit volume of the dielectric is known as polarisation
(P).

For linear isotropic dielectrics, P = χ E, where χ = electrical susceptibility of


the dielectric medium.
(i) Define polarisation vector. Write its S.I. units.
(ii) Why a conductor would not be a good choice as a dielectric for a
capacitor?
(iii) Why the electric field inside the dielectric decreases when placed in an
external electric field.
OR
(iii) Why the capacitance of a capacitor increases on introduction of dielectric
slab between plates?
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39 Figures (a) and (b) show the field lines of a positive and negative point charge 5
respectively.

(a) Give the signs of the potential difference VP – VQ and VB – VA.


(b) Give the sign of the potential energy difference of a small negative charge
between the points Q and P; A and B.
(c) Give the sign of the work done by the field in moving a small positive
charge from Q to P.
(d) Give the sign of the work done by the external agency in moving a small

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 28


negative charge from B to A.
(e) Does the kinetic energy of a small negative charge increase or decrease in
going from B to A?
40 An electric dipole is held in a uniform electric field E. 5

(a) Show that the net force acting on it is zero.


(b) The dipole is aligned with its dipole moment p parallel to E.
Find:
(i) The work done in turning the dipole till its dipole moment points in the
direction opposite to E.
(ii) The orientation of the dipole for which the torque acting on it becomes
maximum.

ANSWER KEY:

Q.NO. Answer MARK


SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]

1 (b) electrostatic potential at that point 1

2 (a) Q/4πε0r 1

3 (d) 4 x 104 V 1

4 (b) E = - dV/dr 1

5 (b) [ML2 T-3 A-1] 1

6 (c) 1

7 (d) increases 1

8 (a) [M-1 L-2 T4 A2] 1

9 (d) - ⃗. ⃗⃗ 1

10 (a) zero 1

11 (d) no work is done 1

12 (d) 4 W [ U = Q2/2C] 1

13 (c) 0.44 x 10-10 C2 N-1 m-2 1

Explanation: εr = Cm/C0 = 30/6 =5

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 29


ε = εr ε0 = 5 x 8.85 x 10-12C2 N-1 m²
14 (a) zero [ E =-dV/dr = -d(5)/dr = 0] 1

15 (d) having a permanent electric dipole moment. 1

Explanation: In polar molecules, the centres of positive and negative charges are
separated by some distance, even when there is no external electric field. Hence,
these molecules have permanent dipole moment, option (d).

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)


16 (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation of A. 1

17 (c) Assertion is true but Reason is false. 1

18 (b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A. 1

19 (c) Assertion is true but Reason is false. 1

20 (c) Assertion is true but Reason is false. 1

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)


21 The slope for q1 has a slope of large magnitude than for q2. So q1 has a larger 1
magnitude than q2.
22 A = Cd/ ε0 = 1F x 10-2 m/8.85 x 10-12C2 N-1 m² = 109 m2 1

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)


23 (a) The plane normal to AB and passing through its mid-point has zero potential 1
everywhere.
(b) Normal to the plane in the direction AB
1
24 (i) E = -dV/dx = -d/dx( 10x + 5) = -10 N/C. 1

(ii) Electric flux = sum of electric flux the cube of all six faces.
Electric flux through the faces perpendicular to Y and Z axis =0 because E is along X
axis.
So, Electric flux through the faces perpendicular to X axis = 10 x (0.2)2- 10 x (0.2)2 =0 1

25 ½

The work dW done in moving a test charge q0 from A to B is


dW = q0{(V+dV)-V} = q0 dV --------------(i)
Also, dW = - q0 E dr ------------------(ii) ½

Thus dV =- E dr ½

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 30


26 Equipotential surfaces: that at every point of which the electric potential is same. ½

Equipotential surfaces for


(a) unit positive charge:

(b) uniform electric field:

(c) two equal and opposite charges:

27 Work done in bringing q1 from infinity at r1 = q1 V(r1) ½

Work done on q2 against the external field at r2 = q2 V(r2) ½

Work done on q2 against the field due q1=k q1 q2/ r1r2 ½

Thus, potential energy of the system = q1 V(r1) + q2 V(r2) + k q1 q2/ r1r2 ½

28 C = q/V ½

A has larger slope than B, so the graph A represents a capacitor of larger capacitance. ½

C = ε0A/d i.e C ∝ A ½

so, C2 has a larger capacitance. Thus, line A represents C2. ½

29 ϕ = q/ε0 ½
∮ ⃗⃗ . ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ = q/ε0 ½

since, qinside =0 ½

so, Einside = 0 ½

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 31


SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)
30 In between the two plates of capacitor, over thickness t, the strength of electric field ½
is E and in the remaining distance (d-t), the strength of electric field is E0. If V is the
potential difference between plates of capacitor, then

V = Et+Eo (d-t) = E0t/K + Eo (d-t) = E0 (d-t+ t/K) = σ (d-t+ t/K) / ε0 = q (d-t+ t/K)/ A ε0
Capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor when electric slab is introduced between
plates is
C= V/Q = A ε0/ (d-t+ t/K) 2

31 Consider an electric dipole AB in


which point charges +q and -q are ½
separated by a distance 2l. Let P
be a point on it's axis separated by
a distance r from the dipole's
centre O.
Electric dipole moment, p = q (2l)
Electric potential (VA) due to +q
charge ,VA=kq/(r-l)
Electric potential (VB) due to +q charge, VB= k(-q) /(r+l)
Therefore, total electric potential at P due to dipole will be, V = VA + VB
V = kq [ 1/r+l - 1/r-l] = kq.2l [1/r2 – l2 ] = k p [1/r2 – l2 ]
Now, l<<r (short dipole)
V = kp /r2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 32


½

32 Consider a parallel plate capacitor having area of each plate A and distance between ½
plates d. Capacitance of parallel plate capacitor will be C = ε0A/d……...(1)
When the capacitor is charged to voltage V, the energy stored in capacitor will be
U = ½ CV2 …………………………(2) ½
and potential difference V = Ed…………………………(3)
Using values from equations (1) and (3) in (2) 1

U = ½ ε0 E² Ad
Volume of the capacitor, V = Ad
so, Energy stored per unit volume = U/V = ½ ε0 E² Ad/Ad = ½ ε0 E² 1

SI unit of energy density = J/m3


½
Dimensional formula of energy density = [M L-1 T-2 ]
½

33 VA = kq/x = 9 x 109 x 4 x 10-9 /x = 36/x ½

VB = 9 x 109 x (-3) x 10-9 /(0.1-x ) = -27/(0.1-x)


½
potential will be zero if VA + VB = 0
or, 36/x = 27/0.1-x
½
or, 3.6 – 36x = 27x
or, 63 x = 3.6
or, x = 3.6/63 m
1

34 C = ε0A/d = 8pF ½

C’ = Kε0A/d’ ½

= Kε0A/(d/2) ½

= 2K ε0A/d ½

= 2 x 5 x 8 pF = 80 pF
1

35 C = ε0A/d
(i) when battery is not disconnected, then V = constant, d’ = 3d & K = 10

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 33


C’ = K ε0A/d’ = 10 ε0A/3d = 10 C/3 1

(ii) Charge Q’ = C’V = 10CV/3 = 10Q/3 1

(iii) Energy density, u’ = 10 u/9 1

36 In series combination:
1/Cs = 1/C1 + 1/C2 =(1/12+ 1/12) pF = 2/12 pF ½

Cs = 6 pF
Us = ½ Cs V2 = 75 x 10-10 J ½

½
Q s= Cs V = 300 pC
½
Cp = C1 + C2 = 24 pF
½
Up = ½ x 24 x 10-12 x 2500 J = 3 x 10-8 J
½
Qp = Cp V = 24 pF x 50 V = 1200 pC

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)


37 (i) zero 1

(ii) Equipotential surface for two identical positive charges:

(iii) Two equipotential surfaces never intersect each other because if the intersect
then at the point of intersection there will be two directions of electric field at the
same point, (i.e., having two tangents at point of intersection), which is never
possible. Hence the equipotential surfaces never intersect.
OR
(iii) If WAB is work done in moving the test charge q from point A to point B then 2

VB – VA = WAB/q
On equipotential surface VB – VA = 0
so, WAB/q = 0
Thus, WAB = 0
Hence no work is done in moving the charge over an equipotential surface.
½

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 34


½

38 (i) It is the induced dipole moment per unit volume of the polarised dielectric. ½

S.I. unit of polarisation vector is C m-2. ½

(ii) We can't maintain a non-zero voltage on a conductor, as the charges will move
from positive to negative end immediately, so they can't be stored. 1
(iii) Due to the polarisation of dielectric an electric field is set up inside the dielectric in
the direction opposite to the external electric field. Thus, the net electric field
2
decreases inside the dielectric.
⃗⃗ = ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ - ⃗⃗⃗⃗̇

OR
(iii) When a dielectric is introduced between the plates of a capacitor, electric field
inside the dielectric decreases. Now, more charge can be given to the capacitor to
maintain the same electric field or capacitor can now hold more charge. As
capacitance is directly proportional to charge for a constant potential, so capacitance
increases.
2

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)


39 (a) As V ∝ 1/r & Vp> VQ. Thus, (Vp- VQ) is positive.
Also VB is less negative than VA . Thus, VB > VA , or (VB-VA) is positive. 1

(b) A small negative charge will be attracted towards positive charge. The negative
charge moves from higher potential energy to lower potential energy. Therefore, the
sign of potential energy difference of a small negative charge between Q and P is
1
positive. Similarly, (P.E.)A > (P.E.)B and hence sign of potential energy differences is
positive.
(c) In moving a small positive charge from Q to P, work has to be done by an external
agency against the electric field. Therefore. work done by the field is negative.
(d) In moving a small negative charge from B to A work has to be done by the external 1
agency. It is positive.
(e) Due to force of repulsion on the negative charge, velocity decreases and hence the
1
kinetic energy decreases in going from B to A.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 35


40

(a) Fnet = +qE – qE =0

(b) (i) W = ∫

=∫

= - 2pE cosθ
1
= - 2 ⃗ . ⃗⃗
½
(ii) since τ = pE sinθ
½
so, torque will maximum when θ = 900.
½

KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA
SANGATHAN
KVS RO KOLKATA

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 36


SESSION 2023-24
STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW
ACHIEVERS
CLASS-XII/XI PHYSICS
CHAPTER: 3- Current Electricity

Q CORE QUESTION MARK


NO. CONCEPT/
FOCUSED-
FORMULA/
TARGATED
THEOREM
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)
1 Conservation of In a current carrying conductor the net charge is - 1
Charge
(a) 1.6 × C(b) 6.25 ×
(c) zero(d) infinite
2 Current A current passes through a wire of non-uniform cross-section. Which of 1
Density, the following quantities are independent of the cross-section?
Thermal
(a) The charge crossing (b) Drift velocity
Velocity
(c) Current density (d) Free-electron density
3 Vector Form of In the equation AB = C, A is the current density, C is the 1
Ohm‘s Law
electric field, Then B is
(a) Resistivity (b) Conductivity
(c) Potential Difference (d) Resistance
4 Drift Velocity Drift velocity of electrons is due to 1
(a) motion of conduction electrons due to random collisions.

(b) motion of conduction electrons due to electric field ⃗⃗


(c) repulsion to the conduction electrons due to inner electrons of ions.
(d) collision of conduction electrons with each other.
5 Drift Velocity The relaxation time in conductors 1
(a) increases with the increases of temperature
(b) decreases with the increases of temperature
(c) it does not depend upon temperature
(d) all of sudden changes at 400 K
6 Non-Ohmic The example of non-ohmic resistance is 1
Resistance

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 37


(a) diode (b) copper wire
(c) filament lamp (d) carbon resistor
7 Kirchoff‘s Law Kirchoff‘s first law deals with the conservation of 1
(a) charge (b) energy
(c) momentum (d) angular momentum
8 Wheatstone Why is the Wheatstone bridge better than the other methods of 1
Bridge measuring resistances?
(a) It does not involve Ohm‘s law(b) It is based on Kirchoff‘s law
(c) It has four resistor arms(d) It is a null method

9 Potentiometer Sensitivity of potentiometer can be increased by 1


(a) increasing the e.m.f of the cell
(b) increasing the length of the potentiometer
(c) decreasing the length of the potentiometer wire
(d) None of these
10 Wheatstone In a wheatstone bridge in the battery and galvanometer 1
Bridge
are interchanged then the deflection in galvanometer will
(a) change in previous direction(b) not change
(c) change in opposite direction(d) none of these.
11 E.m.f. Emf of a cell is 1
(a) the maximum potential difference between the terminalsof a cell
when no current is drawn from the cell.
(b) the force required to push the electrons in the circuit.
(c) the potential difference between the positive andnegative terminal of
a cell in a closed circuit.
(d) less than terminal potential difference of the cell
12 Transmission of To minimise the power loss in the transmission cables 1
Power
connecting the power stations to homes and factories, the
transmission cables carry current
(a) at a very low voltage(b) at a very high voltage(c) at 220 volt
(d) neither at a very high voltage nor at a very low voltage.
13 Series In the series combination of two or more than tworesistances
Combination of
(a) the current through each resistance is same
Resistances
(b) the voltage through each resistance is same

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 38


(c) neither current nor voltage through each resistance issame
(d) both current and voltage through each resistance aresame
14 Maximum A cell of internal resistance r is connected to an external 1
Power Transfer
resistance R. The current will be maximum in R, if
in a Circuit
(a) R = r (b) R < r(c) R > r (d) R = r/2
15 Temperature With increase in temperature the conductivity of 1
dependence of
(a) metals increases and of semiconductor decreases.
Conductivity
(b) semiconductors increases and metals decreases.
(c) in both metals and semiconductors increases.
(d) in both metal and semiconductor decreases.
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 1
16-20)
Assertion: (A). 1
Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS
GIVEN IN ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation
of A.
b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct
explanation of A.
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.
16 Scalar Nature Assertion: Current is a vector quantity. 1
of Current
Reason: Current has magnitude but not direction.
17 Drift Velocity Assertion: The electric bulb glows immediately when switchis on. 1
Reason: The drift velocity of electrons in a metallic wire isvery high.
18 Potentiometer Assertion: The e.m.f of the driver cell in the potentiometerexperiment 1
should be greater that the e.m.f of the cell tobe determined.
Reason: The fall of potential across the potentiometerwire should not be
less than the e.m.f of the cell to be determined.

19 Conductivity Assertion: For a conductor resistivity increases with increase in 1


temperature.

Reason: Since, , So when temperature increases the random


motion of free electrons increases and vibration of ions increases which

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 39


decreases .
20 Charge Assertion: When a current is established in a wire, the freeelectrons drift 1
Conservation in the direction opposite to the current and sothe number of free
electrons in the wire continuouslydecrease.
Reason: Charge is a non-conserved quantity.
SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING
QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)
21 Equivalent A wire has a resistance 12 Ω. It is bent in the form of a circle.The 1
Resistance effective resistance between two points on any diameteris :
(a) 6 Ω(b) 3Ω(c) 12 Ω(d) 24 Ω
22 Equivalent In the network shown below, the ring has zero 1
Resistance resistance.The equivalent resistance between the point A
and B is :
(a) 2Ω(b) 4 Ω (c) 7Ω(d) 10Ω
SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO
23-29)
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26] 2
23 Drift Velocity When 5 V potential difference is applied across a wire of length 0.1 m,
the drift speed of electrons is 2.5 × m/s. If the electron density in
the wire is 8 × , calculate the resistivity of the material of wire.
24 Temperature I – V graph for a metallic wire at two different 2
Dependence of temperatures, and is as shown in the figure.
Resistance

Which of the two temperatures is lower and why?

25 Resistance Draw a graph to show a variation of resistance of a metal wire as a 2


function of its diameter keeping its length and material constant.
26 Ohm‘s Law A 10 V cell of negligible internal resistance 2
Numerical is connected in parallel across a battery of
emf 200 V and internal resistance 38 Ω as
shown in the figure.
Find the value of current in the circuit.

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING


OUTCOME OF THE CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]
27 Power Nichrome and copper wires of same length and same radius are 2
dissipated connected in series. Current I is passed through them. Which wire gets
through Joule heated up more? Justify your answer. Given, Resistivity of Nichrome is

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 40


Heating greater than that of copper.
28 Mobility Define the term ‗Mobility‘ of charge carriers in a conductor. Write its SI 2
unit. What is its relation with relaxation time?
29 E.m.f. A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across an external 2
resistor R. Plot the graph showing the variation of Potential difference V
across R versus resistance R.

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)


FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn30-33) 3
30 Drift Velocity A potential difference V is applied across the ends of copper wire of
length l and diameter D. What is the effect on drift velocity of electrons
if: (i) V is halved? (ii) l is doubled? (iii) D is halved?
31 Series, Parallel Under what condition will the current in a wire be the same when 3
Combination of connected in series and in parallel of n identical cells each having
Resistances internal resistance r and external resistance R?
32 Potentiometer In a potentiometer arrangement for determining the emf of a cell, the 3
balance point of the cell in open circuit is 350 cm. When a resistance of
9 Ω is used in the external circuit of the cell, the balance point shifts to
300 cm. Determine the internal resistance of the cell.
33 Dynamic Graph showing the variation of current versus 3
Resistance from voltage for a material GaAs is shown in figure.
Slope of I/V
Plot
Identify the regions of
(i) Negative resistance.
(ii) Where Ohm‘s law is obeyed.
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING
OUTCOME OF THE CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)
34 Ohm‘s Law, The plot of the variation of potential difference 3
Load line across a combination of three identical cells in
Analysis series, versus current is shown alongside.
What is the emf and internal resistance of each
cell?

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 41


35 Application of Calculate the value of the current drawn 3
Wheatstone from a 5 V battery in the circuit as
Bridge shown.

36 Kirchoff‘s Law Using Kirchoff‘s rules determine 3


& Open loop the value of unknown resistance R
Analysis in the circuit so that no current
flows through 4 Ω resistance.
Also find the potential difference
between A and D.
SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-
38)
37 EMF & Internal Two cells of emfs 1.5 V and 2.0 V having internal resistances 0.2 Ω and 4
Resistance of a 0.3 Ω respectively are connected in parallel. Calculate the emf and
Cell internal resistance of the equivalent cell.
38 Meter Bridge In a meter bridge shown in the figure, the 4
Numerical balance point is found to be 40 cm from end
A. If a resistance of 10 Ω is connected in
series with R, balance point is obtained 60
cm from A. Calculate the value of R and S.
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)
39 Kirchoff‘s Law Twelve wires each having a resistance of 3Ω are connected to form a 5
involving cubical network. A battery of 10 V and negligible internal resistance is
Symmetry connected across the diagonally opposite corners of this network.
operations Determine its equivalent resistance and the current along each edge of
the cube.
40 Kirchoff‘s law State Kirchhoff‘s rules. 5
Use these rules to write the expressions
for the currents 𝐼 , 𝐼 and 𝐼 in the circuit
diagram shown.

Sl no. Important Video link [OPTIONAL]


1
2
3

Sl no. Important Facts/ information you like to share

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 42


OR [OPTIONAL]
Short cut Tips
1
2
3

ANSWER KEY:
Q.NO. Answer MARK
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]
1 (c)In a current carrying conductor, the net charge is zero. 1
2 (d) Free-electron density. 1
3 (a) Resistivity 1
4 (b) motion of conduction electrons due to electric field ⃗⃗ 1

5 (b) decreases with the increases of temperature 1


6 (a) diode 1
7 (a) charge 1
8 (d) It is a null method 1
9 (b) increasing the length of the potentiometer 1
10 (b) not change 1
11 (a) the maximum potential difference between the terminalsof a cell when no current is 1
drawn from the cell.
12 (b) at a very high voltage 1
13 (a) the current through each resistance is same 1
14 (a) R = r 1
15 (b) semiconductors increases and metals decreases. 1
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)
16 d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect. 1
17 c) Assertion is true but Reason is false. 1
18 a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation of A. 1
19 a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation of A. 1
20 d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect. 1
SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN
NO 21-22)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 43


21 (a) 6 Ω 1
22 (a) 2Ω 1
SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)
23 We have Resistivity, ρ = (1 mark) 2

or, ρ = (1 mark)

24 For a constant Current I, R = 2


⸫ (1 mark)
As R ∝ T , Hence (1 mark)

25 R= = ∝ (1 mark) (1 mark) 2

26 I= (1 mark) 2

(1 mark)

27 Heat dissipated in a wire is, H = 𝐼 𝐼 ⟹ 𝐻∝ (1 mark) 2

⸫ (1 mark)

28 Mobility, μ = = (1 mark) 2

S.I. unit = (1 mark)


29 2

V= IR = (1 mark) (1 mark)

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 44


30 Drift Velocity, = 3

(i) As ∝ , When V is halved, is also halved. (1 mark)

(ii) As ∝ , When is doubled, is halved (1 mark)

(iii) As is independent of D, When D is halved, is constant. (1 mark)


31 Let n identical cell of internal resistance r connected in series and parallel with external 3
resistance R.

⸫𝐼 (1 mark)

𝐼 (1 mark)

As per question, 𝐼 𝐼

or, ⟹r=R (1 mark)

32 Given, Emf of the cell, E=k , balance point of the cell in open circuit 3
V=k , balance point of the cell in closed circuit with ext. Resistance
R = 9Ω. (1 mark)

We know, Int. Resistance of the cell, r = R( ) (1 mark)

Or, r (1 mark)

33 We have Resistance, = Slope of the Plot (1 mark) 3

(i) Region of Negative resistance = Region DE


As, Slope of the Plot =(-) ve in Region DE (1 mark)

(ii) Where Ohm‘s law is obeyed = Region AB


As, Slope of the Plot = Constant in Region AB. (1 mark)
34 V= 𝐼 ,where (1 3
mark)
From the plot, when I = 0 A, then =6V

∴ 6 = 3E – 0 ⟹ E = 3 V (1 mark)
From the plot, when = 0 A, then I = 1 A

∴ – (1×3r) ⟹ r = 2 Ω (1 mark)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 45


35 Since the condition , it is a balanced bridge. 3

So, no current flows along arm BC. (1 mark)

∴ Equivalent resistance,

or, = 10 Ω (1 mark)

⸫Current, I = (1 mark)

36 Applying Kirchhoff's loop rule for loop ABEFA, 3


–9 + 6 + 4 × 0 + 2I = 0
or, I = 1.5 A (1 mark)
For loop BCDEB, 3 + IR + 4 × 0 – 6 = 0

or, R = = 2Ω (1 mark)

To find Potential difference between A and D, using KVL through open loop ABCD,
9 – 3 – IR =
or, ( 𝐼
SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)
37 Given, , 4

= = 1.7 V (2 marks)

= 0.12 (2 marks)

38 We have, = ….(i) (1 mark) 4

= …(ii) (1 mark)

Solving equations (i) & (ii), we get,


S = 12 Ω (1 mark)
R= 8 Ω (1 mark)

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 46


39 Applying KVL to loop ABCC'EFA, 5

(1 mark)

or, (1 mark)

(1 mark)

Current in Branches (AB, A , AD,


) =I= (1
mark)

Current in Branches (D , , , )= = (1 mark)

40 Kirchhoff‘s Rules: (1 mark) 5


(i) The algebraic sum of currents meeting at any junction is zero, i.e., ∑I = 0
(ii) The algebraic sum of potential differences across circuit elements of a closed circuit
is zero, i.e., ∑V = 0
From Kirchoff‘s law, 𝐼 𝐼 +𝐼
KVL in loop ABDCA: 4𝐼 - 𝐼 =1 …(i) (1 mark)
KVL in loop ABFEA: 3𝐼 + 𝐼 =1 …(ii) (1 mark)
Solving Equations (i) & (ii), we get

𝐼 A

𝐼 (2 marks)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 47


KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

KVS RO KOLKATA

SESSION 2023-24

STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS

CLASS-XII PHYSICS

CHAPTER:4 MOVING CHARGES AND


MAGNETISM

Q CORE QUESTION M
NO. CONCEPT/ A
FOCUSED- R
FORMULA/ K
TARGATED
THEOREM

SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)

1 A charged Which of the following statements is correct? 1


particle in a
(a) A charged particle can be accelerated by a magnetic field.
uniform
magnetic field (b) A charged particle cannot be accelerated by a magnetic field.

(c) The speed of a charged particle can be increased by a uniform magnetic field.

(d) The speed of a charged particle can be increased by a nonuniform magnetic field.

2 A charged A proton moves horizontally towards a vertical conductor carrying a current 1


particle in a upwards. It will be deflected
uniform
magnetic field (a) to the left (b) to the right (c) upwards (d) downwards

3 A charged A proton and an Alpha-particle with the same kinetic energy are moving in circular 1
particle in a
trajectories in a constant magnetic field. If rp and ra denote respectively the radii of the
uniform
magnetic field trajectories of these particles,

(a) rp > ra (b) rp = ra (c) rp < ra (d) rp= ra

4 A current A circular loop of area 1cm2, carrying a current of 10A is placed in a uniform magnetic 1
carrying field
conductor in a
of 0.1T perpendicular to the plane of the loop. The force on the loop due to magnetic
uniform
field is
magnetic field
A) Zero b)10-4N c) 10-2N d) 1 N

5 Two long Two long conductors separated by a distance d carry currents I1 and I2 in the same 1
conductors in a
direction. They exert a force F on each other. Now the current in one of them is
uniform
increased to
magnetic field
two times and its direction is reversed. The distance is also increased to 3d. The new
value of

the force between them is

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 48


A) -2F B)F/3 C)-2F/3 D)-F/3

6 Dipole A circular coil of one turn with radius R carrying a current I has a dipole moment M. 1
moment Now

the coil is opened and rewound to have two turns without altering the current. The new

dipole moment of the coil is

A) M/2 B) 2M C) M D)4M

7 Magnetic field In order to float a wire carrying current I with linear mass density μ in the air , the 1
properties
direction and magnitude of magnetic field to be is (Current is passing left to right)

A) μg/I into the plane B) μg/I vertically upward

B) μg/IL into the plane D) μg/I L vertically upward

8 Moving coil A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 100Ω and the meter shows full scale deflection 1
galvanometer for a

current of 1mA. The shunt resistance required to convert the galvanometer into an
ammeter

of range 0 to 5A is about

A) 0.01 Ω B) 0.1Ω C) 0.02 Ω D) 0.2 Ω

9 Biot Savart’s 1
Law

10 Moving coil If we increase the number of turns of the coil of the moving coil galvanometer what 1
galvanometer happens

to the sensitivity?

A)Current sensitivity remains constant but voltage sensitivity changes

B)Current sensitivity increases but voltage sensitivity remains same

C)Both of them increase

D) No change in them

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 49


11 Solenoid An electron is projected with uniform velocity along the axis of a current carrying long 1

Solenoid. Which of the following is true?

(a) The electron will be accelerated along the axis.

(b) The electron path will be circular about the axis.

(c) The electron will experience a force at 45° to the axis and hence execute a helical
path.

(d) The electron will continue to move with uniform velocity along the axis of the
solenoid.

12 Magnetic A wire in the form of a circular loop, of one turn carrying a current, produces magnetic 1
induction
induction B at the centre. If the same wire is looped into a coil of two turns and carries
the

same current, the new value of magnetic induction at the centre is

(a) B (b) 2 B (c) 4 B (d) 8 B

13 Solenoid A solenoid has 1000 turns per meter length. If a current of 5A is flowing through it, then 1

magnetic field inside the solenoid is

(a) 2π X 10-3 T (b) 2π X 10-5 T

(c) 4π X 10-3 T (d) 4π X 10-5 T

14 Moving coil The coil of a moving coil galvanometer is wound over a metal frame in order to 1
galvanometer
(a) Reduce hysteresis (b) increase sensitivity

(c) Increase moment of inertia (d) provide electromagnetic damping

15 Magnetic Two wires of same length are shaped into a square and a circle if they carry same
dipole moment current,

ratio of magnetic moment is :

(a) 2 : π (b) π : 2 (c) 4 : π (d) π : 4

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20) 1

Assertion: (A). 1

Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS GIVEN IN
ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct explanation of
A.
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.
16 force on a Assertion(A): The centripetal force on the test charge qo is qovB, where v is the velocity 1
charge in of a particle and B is the magnetic field.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 50


magnetic field Reason (R): When a charged particle is fired at right angles to the magnetic field, the
radius of its circular path is directly proportional to the kinetic energy of the particle.

17 The magnetic Assertion (A): Magnetic field due to an infinite straight conductor varies inversely as the 1
field due to a distance from it.
straight
Reason (R): The magnetic field due to a straight conductor is in the form of concentric
conductor
circles.

18 A rectangular Assertion (A): A rectangular current loop is in an arbitrary orientation in an external 1


current loop in uniform magnetic field. No work is required to rotate the loop about an axis
uniform perpendicular to the plane of loop.
magnetic field
Reason (R): All positions represent the same level of energy.

19 Magnetic field Assertion (A): The magnitude of magnetic field in a region is equal to the number of 1
line magnetic field lines per unit area where area should be normal to the field.

Reason (R): Magnetic field is tangential to a magnetic field line.

20 force on a Assertion (A): If a proton and an α-particle enter a uniform magnetic field 1
charge in perpendicularly with the same speed, the time period of revolution of α-particle is
magnetic field double than that of proton.

Reason (R): In a magnetic field, the period of revolution of a charged particle is directly
proportional to the mass of the particle and inversely proportional to the charge of the
particle

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 force on a A beam of electrons projected along +x-axis, experiences a force due to a magnetic field 1
charge in
magnetic field

along the +y-axis? What is the direction of the magnetic field?

22 force on a Which of the following is true about the motion of the particle in uniform magnetic 1
charge in field, where
magnetic field
the charged particle enters at right angles to the field?

(a) Force will always be perpendicular to the velocity.

(b) Kinetic energy of the particle remains constant.

(c) Velocity vector and magnetic field vector remains perpendicular to each other
during the

motion.

(d) All of these

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26] 2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 51


23 force on a A proton and an alpha particle of the same enter, in turn, a region of uniform magnetic
charge in field acting perpendicular to their direction of motion. Deduce the ratio of the radii of
magnetic field the circular paths described by the proton and alpha particle.

24 Magnetic What will be (i) Pole strength (ii) Magnetic moment of each of new piece of bar magnet 2
dipole moment if the magnet is cut into two equal pieces (a) normal to its length? (b)along its length?

25 magnetic filed How will the magnetic filed intensity at the centre of a circular coil carrying current 2
intensity change if the current through the coil is doubled and the radius of the coil is halved.

26 Lorentz force A charged particle of mass 5 mg and charge q = 2 µC has velocity v= 2i – 3j + 4k. Find out 2
the magnetic force on the charged particle and its acceleration at this instant due to the
magnetic field B = 3j – 2 are in Wb/sq. m and m/s respectively.

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF THE


CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]

27 Voltmeter Out of Voltmeter and Milli voltmeter, which has the higher resistance? 2

28 Two long Two long straight wires are set parallel to each other. Each carries a current I in the 2
conductors in a same direction and the separation between them is 2r. What is the intensity of the
uniform magnetic field midway between them?
magnetic field

29 solenoid A solenoid of length 0.6m has a radius of 1cm and is made up of 600 turns.It carries a 2
current of 5A.What is the magnetic field inside and at ends of solenoid.?

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33) 3

30 moving coil (a)state two properties of the material of the wire used for suspension of the coil in a
galvanometer moving coil galvanometer.

(b)The coils, in certain galvanometer have fixed core made of a non-magnetic material.
Why does the oscillating coil come to rest so quickly in such core?

31 moving coil A galvanometer of resistance 120 gives full scale deflection for a current of 5mA. How 3
galvanometer can it be converted into an ammeter of range 0 to 5A? Also determine the net
resistance of the ammeter.

32 Biot Savart’s A current of 10A flows through a semicircular wire of radius 2cm as shown in figure (a). 3
Law What is direction and magnitude of the magnetic field at the centre of semicircle?
Would your answer change if the wire were bent as shown in figure (b)?

33 Magnetic field Draw field line produce by 3


lines
(a) a bar magnet.

(b) A solenoid

(c) And a electric dipole

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 52


MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF THE
CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)

34 Ampere’s 3
circuital law

35 moving coil 3
galvanometer

36 A current 3
carrying
conductor in a
uniform
magnetic field

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 Related with During a solar flare, a large number of electrons and protons are ejected from the sun. 4
natural Some of them get trapped in the earth’s magnetic field and move in helical paths along
phenomenon the field lines. The field lines come closer to each other near the magnetic poles, hence
the density of charges increases near the poles. The particles collide with atoms and
molecules of the atmosphere. Excited oxygen atoms emit green light and excited
nitrogen atoms emit pink light. This phenomenon is called ‘Aurora Borealis’.

1.When will the path of the particle be helix, when it is moving in external magnetic
field?

(a) When v has a component parallel to B

(b) When v has a component perpendicular to B

(c) When v is parallel to B

(d) None of these

2.When the charged particle travelling in a helical path enters a region where the

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 53


magnetic field is

non-uniform, the pitch of helix of the charge particle will be

(a) Same as in uniform magnetic field

(b) Increases as the charge moves inside the magnetic field

(c) Decreases as the charge moves inside the magnetic field

(d) First increases then decreases as the charge moves inside the magnetic field

3.The colour of Aurora Borealis is due to

(A) Excited ozone, chromium atoms

(B) Excited Oxygen and Nitrogen atoms

( C) Due to presence of water vapours in the atmosphere

(D) Excited electrons and protons in the atmosphere

4.The density of magnetic field lines is greater________ on the earth

(a) At the poles

(b) Near the equator

(c) Uniform everywhere on the surface

(d) None of these

38 Lorentz force A charge q moving with a velocity v in presence of both electric and magnetic fields 4
experience

force F = q [ E + v x B ]. If electric and magnetic fields are perpendicular to each other


and also

perpendicular to the velocity of the particle, the electric and magnetic forces are in
opposite

directions. If we adjust the value of electric and magnetic field such that magnitude of
the two

forces are equal. The total force on the charge is zero and the charge will move in the
fields

undeflected.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 54


1.What will be the value of velocity of the charge particle, when it moves undeflected in
a region

where the electric field is perpendicular to the magnetic field and the charge particle
enters at

right angles to the fields.

A. v = E/B
B. v = B/E
C. v = EB
D. v = EB/q

2.Proton, neutron, alpha particle and electron enter a region of uniform magnetic field
with same

velocities. The magnetic field is perpendicular to the velocity. Which particle will
experience

maximum force?

(a) proton

(b) electron

(c) alpha particle

(d) neutron

3.A charge particle moving with a constant velocity passing through a space without any
change in

the velocity. Which can be true about the region?

(a) E = 0, B = 0

(b) E ≠ 0, B ≠ 0

(c) E = 0, B ≠ 0

(d) All of these

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 55


4.Proton, electron and deuteron enter a region of uniform magnetic field with same
electric

potential-difference at right angles to the field. Which one has a more curved
trajectory?

(a) electron

(b) proton

(c) deuteron

(d) all will have same radius of circular path

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39 Moving coil 5
galvanometer

40 Biot Savart’s 5
law

Sl no. Important Video link [OPTIONAL]

1 https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/1PQhfrT32TsAcTcOjWpnyDKTR3SLIdySb?usp=drive_link

2 https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/1QTODqsqkxKmDKtNVavRiLkO_y1gUjulz?usp=drive_link

Sl no. Important Facts/ information you like to share


OR [OPTIONAL]
Short cut Tips

1 Make a CRT TV Into an Oscilloscope


Purpose

To observe the change in the path of charged particle(electron) by varying the applied

electric field

Supplies

-A CRT TV (black and white)

-Some wire

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 56


-A soldering gun

-Rubber gripped pliers (for safety)

-A screw driver

Step 1: Identify Wires

After undoing all screws remove the cover from the TV.

Inside wrapped around the CRT are two coils of wire, one controls the vertical deflection

of electrons, the other controls the horizontal deflection.

Find where these coils of wire attach to the circuit board, and desolder one coil.

Place the cover back on the TV(for safety) and plug in and turn on the TV.

If you see a horizontal line, you desoldered the vertical deflection coil.

If you see a vertical line, you desoldered the horizontal deflection coil.

Step 2: Placing Wires

Desolder the vertical coil if you haven't already and attach extra wire to the vertical coil,

this will have to be long enough to come out of the TV so you can attach a voltage

source.

Now desolder the horizontal coil, and solder it to where the vertical coil was.

Step 3: That's It

Really, it's an oscilloscope now.

ANSWER KEY:

Q.NO. Answer M
A
R
K
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]

1 A 1

2 D 1

3 B 1

4 A 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 57


5 C 1

6 A 1

7 B 1

8 C 1

9 B 1

10 B 1

11 D 1

12 C 1

13 A 1

14 D 1

15 D 1

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)

16 C 1

17 B 1

18 A 1

19 B 1

20 A 1

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 By Fleming's left hand rule magnetic field must be along negative z− axis. 1

22 D 1

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

23 ( )= 𝑞 and (𝛼) = 4 2𝑞 = 2 𝑞 →r(α)=2r(n) 2

24 (a) Pole strength same; magnetic moment half. (b) pole strength half; magnetic moment half. 2

25 B = μ0n 2I / 2 (R/2) 2

26 =𝐹 = 𝑞( 𝑥 𝑩) =0.8 ( -3i +2j +3k) m/s 2 2

27 We know the resistance connected to galvanometer to convert it into voltmeter is R = (V / Ig) - G 2


So if R is higher, range of V will also be higher, so a Voltmeter has the higher resistance.

28 The fields of the two wires will be in the opposite directions at the midway point. B =B1 –B2 2
=μ0I/2πr -μ0I/2 π r =0

29 (i)At the centre n=1000, B = μ0 nI = 4 𝜋 x 10-7 x 1000 x 5 = 6.2 x 10-3 T (ii) At the ends B = μ0 ni = 2
3.1 x 10 -3 T

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

30 (a) i)small torsion constant K 3


(b) ii)High tensile strength
(b) The eddy current set up in the metallic material oppose the motion

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 58


31 S= 𝐼 𝐺 /(𝐼−𝐼 ) =0.12Ω 3

32 a) 5x10 -5 outward 3

b) a) 5x10 -5 inward.

33 3

34 3

35 3

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 59


36 3

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 A 4

38 A 4

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 60


39 5

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 61


40 5

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 62


KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

KVS RO KOLKATA

SESSION 2023-24

STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS

CLASS-XII PHYSICS

CHAPTER 5: MAGNETISM AND MATTER

Q CORE QUESTION M
NO. CONCEPT/ A
FOCUSED- R
FORMULA/ K
TARGATED
THEOREM

SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)

1 CORE Magnetism in the substances is caused by 1


CONCEPT
(a)orbital motion of electrons only

(b)spin motion of electrons only

(c ) due to spin and orbital motion of electrons both

(d) hidden magnets

2 CORE The major contribution of magnetism in substances is due to 1


CONCEPT
(a)orbital motion of electrons only

(b)spin motion of electrons only

(c ) equally due to spin and orbital motion of electrons

(d) hidden magnets)

3 CORE A sensitive magnetic instrument can be shielded very effectively from outside fields 1
CONCEPT by placing it inside a box of

(a) teak wood

(b) plastic materials

(c ) soft iron of high permeability

(d) a metal of high conductivity

4 CORE Liquid oxygen remains suspended between two pole faces of a magnet because it is 1
CONCEPT
a) diamagnetic

b) paramagnetic

c) ferromagnetic

d) anti ferromagnetic

5 CORE A magnetic needle is kept in a non-uniform magnetic field. It experiences 1


CONCEPT

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 63


(a) a force and a torque

(b) a force but not a torque

(c ) a torque but not a force

(d) neither a torque nor a force

6 CORE A bar magnet of magnetic moment ⃗⃗⃗ is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 1
CONCEPT
induction ⃗⃗. The torque exerted on it is

(a) ⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗

(b) ⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗

(c ) ⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗

(d) ⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗

7 FOCUSED- Points A and B are situated perpendicular to the axis of a 2 cm long bar magnet at 1
FORMULA large distance x and 3x from its centre on opposite sides. The ratio of magnetic fields
at A and B will be approximately equal to

(a) 1 : 9

(b) 2 : 9

(c )27 : 1

(d) 9 : 1

8 FOCUSED- The ratio of magnetic fields due to a small bar magnet in the end on position to the 1
FORMULA broad side on position is

(a) 1:4 (b) 1:2 (c ) 1:1 (d) 2:1

9 CORE If a dia-magnetic substance is brought near the north or the south pole of a bar 1
CONCEPT magnet, it is

(a) repelled by the north pole repelled by the south pole

(b) attracted by the north pole repelled by the south pole

(c ) attracted by both the poles

(d) repelled by both the poles

10 FOCUSED- A bar magnet having a magnetic moment of 𝐽 is free to rotate in a 1


FORMULA horizontal plane. A horizontal magnetic field exists in the space. The
workdone in taking the magnet slowly from a direction parallel to the field to a
direction 60° from the field is

(a) 12 J (b) 6 J (c ) 2 J (d) 0.6 J

11 CORE Which of the following is an example for diamagnetic substances? 1


CONCEPT
(a) copper (b) nickel (c) aluminium (d) iron

12 CORE S.I. unit of magnetic pole strength is 1


CONCEPT
(a) Ampere/meter

(b) Ampere-meter

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 64


(c) volt/meter

(d)

13 FOCUSED- A bar magnet AB with magnetic moment M is cut into two equal parts perpendicular 1
FORMULA to its axis. One part is kept over the other so that end B is exactly over A. What will be
the magnetic moment of the combination so formed?

(a) Zero (b) M/4 (c) M (d) 3M/4

14 CORE Which of the following is weakly repelled by a magnet field: 1


CONCEPT
(a) Iron (b) Cobalt (c) Steel (d) Copper

15 CORE If a diamagnetic material is placed in a magnetic field, the magnetic field inside the 1
CONCEPT material compared to that outside will be

(a) Slightly less (b) Slightly more (c) Very high (d) Same

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20) 1

Assertion: (A). 1

Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS GIVEN
IN ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct explanation of
A.
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.
e) Assertion is false but Reason is true.
16 CORE 1
CONCEPT

Assertion (A): Two short magnets are placed on a cork which floats on water. The
magnets are placed such that the axis of one produced bisects the axis of other at
right angles. Then the cork has neither translational nor rotational motion.

Reason ( R ) : Net force on the cork is zero.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 65


17 CORE Assertion (A): Para magnetism and ferromagnetism are associated with orbital 1
CONCEPT motion of electrons.

Reason ( R ) : In ferro magnetics the magnetic effect is increased due to the


formation of domains.

18 CORE 1
CONCEPT

Assertion (A): The ratio of magnetic length and geometrical length of a bar magnet is
nearly 0.84

Reason ( R ) : The two poles which are slightly inside the two ends.

19 CORE Assertion (A): Materials having negative value of electric susceptibility are 1
CONCEPT diamagnetic.

Reason ( R ) : Since there can be no magnetization in vacuum therefore its electric


susceptibility is zero.

20 CORE Assertion (A): Cutting a bar magnet into two equal pieces perpendicular to its length 1
CONCEPT produces magnets of same pole strength but half the dipole moment.

Reason ( R ) : Work done in cutting the magnet reduces the dipole moment.

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 CORE Two identical bar magnets are fixed with their centres at a distance d apart. A 1
CONCEPT stationary charge Q is placed at P in between the gap of the two magnets at a
distance D from the centre O as shown in the figure. Find the force on the charge Q.

22 CORE A frog can be levitated in a magnetic field produced by a current in a vertical solenoid 1
CONCEPT placed below the frog. How can you predict the nature of behaviour of body of the
frog as per properties of magnetic materials.

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26] 2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 66


23 FOCUSED-
FORMULA

Two circular concentric loops of radii are placed in the


XY plane as shown the figure. A current 𝐼 is flowing through them. Find the
magnetic moment of this loop system.

24 FOCUSED- The time period of oscillation of a thin rectangular magnet when suspended freely is 2
FORMULA T. Now it is broken into two equal halves (each having half of its original length) and
one piece is made to oscillate freely in the same field. The new time period becomes
. Compare these two time periods.

25 FOCUSED- Define magnetic moment. A steel wire has magnetic moment M. Find the new 2
FORMULA magnetic moment if it is bent into a semi-circle.

26 CORE The permeability of a magnetic material is 0.9983. Identify the magnetic material and 2
CONCEPT draw its field lines when placed in a uniform magnetic field.

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF THE


CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]

27 CORE The susceptibility of a magnetic material is . Identify the 2


CONCEPT
type of magnetic material and state its two properties.
28 FOCUSED- A circular coil of N turns and diameter d carries a current I. It is 2
FORMULA
unwound and rewound to make another coil of diameter 2d,
current I remaining the same. Calculate the ratio of the magnetic
moments of the new coil and the original coil.
29 FOCUSED- A short bar magnet of magnetic moment 0.9 J/T is placed with its 2
FORMULA
axis at 30: to a uniform magnetic field. It experiences a torque of
0.063 J.
(i) Calculate the magnitude of the magnetic field.
(ii) In which orientation will the bar magnet be in stable
equilibrium in the magnetic field?
SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33) 3

30 FOCUSED- A closely wound solenoid of 2000 turns and cross-sectional area


FORMULA
carrying a current of 4A is suspended through its center
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 67
allowing it to turn in a horizontal plane. Find (i) the magnetic
moment associated with the solenoid, (ii) magnitude and direction
of the torque on the solenoid if a horizontal magnetic field of
is set up at an angle of 30: with the axis of the solenoid.
31 Derive an expression for the axial magnetic field of a finite solenoid 3
of length and radius r carrying current . Under what condition
does the field become equivalent to that produced by the bar
magnet?
32 FOCUSED- A bar magnet of magnetic moment 6 J/T is aligned at 60 with a 3
FORMULA
uniform external magnetic field of 0.44 T. Calculate (a) the work
done in turning the magnet to align its magnetic moment (i)
normal to the magnetic field, (ii) opposite to the magnetic field,
and (b) the torque on the magnet in the final orientation in case
(ii).
33 FOCUSED- (i) Write the mathematical expression for magnetic field due to a 3
FORMULA
magnetic dipole.
(ii) From the above formula for axial and equatorial point.
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF THE
CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)

34 CORE A wire of length L is bent round in the form of (i) a square, and 3
CONCEPT
then (ii) an equilateral triangle. If current I is passed through each
of them, find the ratio of magnetic moment of the square loop to
that of the triangle.
35 CORE (i)A wire of length L is in the form of a circular loop A of one turn. 3
CONCEPT
This loop is reshaped into loop B of three turns. Find the ratio of
the magnetic fields at the centres of loop A and loop B for the
same current through them.
(ii)

36 CORE Two wires of equal lengths are shaped in the form of a square loop 3
CONCEPT
and a circular loop. Both loops are suspended in a uniform
magnetic field. Prove that for the same current the circular loop
will experience larger torque.
SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 FOCUSED- A study is made on mass spectrometer. It uses a superconducting 4


ON
CONCEPT magnet which is basically an electromagnet. The coils of this
AMD
FORMULA
magnet are cooled below the critical temperature such that wire
has zero electrical resistance. It conducts very high current creating

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 68


intense magnetic field. Liquid helium is used as a coolant. The
magnetic field generated by this magnet is about 2T. The field
generated by super-magnet is more stable. They consume less
power. The D.C source provides high amount but at very less
voltage.

Using the above information and understanding of basic concepts


of magnetism, answer any 4 of the followings

(i) supermagnets are made from


a) superconductor b) alkali conductor
c) transition metal d) ferrites

(ii) Modern supermagnets have all excepts


a) liquid helium b) liquid nitrogen
c) main magnet winding d) superconducting coils

(iii) A magnetic needle with magnetic moment


and moment of inertia
𝐼 performs 10 complete oscillations in 6.7 s
in a uniform magnetic field. Calculate the magnitude of the
magnetic field.
OR
Suggest an arrangement to produce a magnetic field with zero
magnetic dipole moment of the source. Also give the values of

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 69


magnetic susceptibility and relative permeability for the material
that exhibit perfect diamagnetism.
38 Three students collect various materials together like Bi, Cu, 4
Diamond, Au, Pb, Hg, Ag, Si, Al, Ca, Cr, Li, Mg, Niobium, Pt, W, Fe,
Co, Ni, Gadolinium, Dysprosium etc.
They want to distinguish these above materials on the basis of
their magnetic properties by placing them inside the uniform
magnetic field. Now answer the followings:

(i) Al, Ca, Cr, Li, Mg, Niobium, Pt, W are

a) diamagnetic

b) paramagnetic

c) ferromagnetic

d) anti ferromagnetic

(ii)

This diagram shows for the following materials

a) Fe, Co, Ni, Gadolinium, Dysprosium


b) Fe, Co, Ni, Al, Ca, Cr
c) Al, Ca, Cr, Li, Mg, Niobium, Pt, W
d) Bi, Cu, Diamond, Au, Pb, Hg, Ag, Si

(iii) A steel wire of length l has a magnetic moment M. It is bent


into L shape from the middle. Calculate the new magnetic
moment.
OR
A bar magnet is held at right angles to a uniform magnetic field.
The couple acting on the magnet is to be halved by rotating it from

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 70


this position. Calculate the angle of rotation.
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39 Write the difference between par-, dia- and ferro- magnetic 5


materials, giving examples for each. Draw the field lines in each
case.
40 Derive an expression for the magnetic moment of an electron 5
revolving around the nucleus in terms of its angular momentum.
What is the direction of magnetic moment of the electron with
respect to its angular momentum?

ANSWER KEY:

Q.NO. Answer MARK


SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]

1 C 1

2 B 1

3 C 1

4 A 1

5 A 1

6 C 1

7 C 1

8 D 1

9 D 1

10 B 1

11 A 1

12 B 1

13 A 1

14 D 1

15 A 1

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)

16 A 1

17 E 1

18 A 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 71


19 B 1

20 C 1

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 ZERO 1

22 This is possible because the body of the frog behaves as diamagnetic 1

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

23 𝑀 𝑀 𝑀 𝐼𝜋 ̂ ̂ 2

24 𝐼 2
𝐼 𝐼
𝜋√ ⟹ 𝜋√ 𝜋√ ⟹
𝑀 𝑀 𝑀
( )

As length is halved so magnetic moment gets halved and


𝐼
𝑀𝐼

25 𝑀 𝑁𝐼 2

𝑀 𝑀
𝜋
26 2

Diamagnetic material

27 Diamagnetic material: low permeability, tendency to move from stronger 2


to weaker part of external magnetic field
28 𝐼 2

𝑁 𝑁
⟹ 𝑁 𝜋( ) 𝑁 𝜋( )⟹𝑁

𝑀 𝑁𝐼 𝑁 𝑀
( ) ⟹ ( )
𝑀 𝑁𝐼 𝑁 𝑀
29 a) 𝑀 𝐽 𝐽 2

𝑀 ⟹
𝑀 𝑀

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 72


ii)
SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

30 3

𝑁 𝐼

The magnetic moment


𝑀 𝑁𝐼
And the torque acting perpendicular to both dipole and magnetic field will
be
𝑁𝐼 𝑀 𝐽

31 3

A finite solenoid of length and radius r carrying current

With number of turns per unit length ‘n’( )

An element of thickness dx is placed at a distance x then the magnetic


field due to this element at O is

𝐼 𝑥
{ 𝑥 } /

Hence the total magnetic field will be


𝐼 𝑥

{ 𝑥 }
𝐼
⟹ ∫ 𝑥

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 73


𝐼 𝑀

𝜋
32 𝑀 𝐽 3

i) 𝑀 𝑀 𝐽

ii) 𝑀 𝑀 𝐽

iii) 𝑀 𝜋
33 The magnetic field intensity due to magnetic dipole is 3

𝑀 √
𝜋
At axial point

𝑀
𝑥
𝜋
At equatorial point

𝑀
𝑥
𝜋
34 For square, 3

𝐿 𝐿
𝐿 ⟹ ⟹

For equilateral triangle,

𝐿 𝐿
𝐿 ⟹ ⟹

Ratio of magnetic moments will be

𝑀
𝑀

35 𝑁𝐼 3

36 𝐿 𝐿 3
𝐿 ⟹ ⟹ 𝑞

𝐿 𝐿
𝐿 𝜋 ⟹ ⟹
𝜋 𝜋
𝑁𝐼 ⟹ 𝑞
⟹ 𝑞
SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 74


37 (i) A 4

(ii) B

(iii)

𝐼 𝐼𝜋
𝜋√ ⟹
𝑀

OR

Inside a current carrying toroid the magnetic field is non-zero but the dipole moment of the
toroid is zero as it has no free north and south pole.

Super conductors exhibit perfect diamagnetism for which

38 (i) B 4

(ii) D

(iii)

Distance between the poles on bending the wire into L shape is

𝑀 𝑀
𝑀

OR

𝑀 𝑀
⟹𝑀 𝑀 ⟹

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39 Diamagnetic materials 5

Ex- (Bi, Cu, Diamond, Au, Pb, Hg, N(STP), Ag, Si)
a) These are repelled by a magnetic field; an applied magnetic field creates an induced
magnetic field in them in the opposite direction, causing a repulsive force.
b) There are no atomic dipoles in diamagnetic materials because the resultant
magnetic moment of each atom is zero due to paired electrons. Diamagnetic
materials are repelled by a magnet.
c) Magnetic susceptibility is small and negative.
d) The relative permeability is slightly less than unity.
e) These materials are independent of temperature; diamagnetic materials do not
obey Curie’s law.
f) They lose their magnetic properties when external magnetic field is removed.
Paramagnetic materials
Ex- Al, Ca, Cr, Li, Mg, Niobium, O(STP), Pt, W

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 75


a) These are materials that tend to get weakly magnetized in the direction
of the magnetizing field when placed in a magnetic field. Paramagnetic
materials have a permanent dipole moment or
permanent magnetic moment. However, if we remove the applied field
the materials tend to lose their magnetism.
b) Paramagnetism is due to the presence of unpaired electrons in the
material, so most atoms with incompletely filled atomic orbitals are
paramagnetic, although exceptions such as copper exist. Due to their spin,
unpaired electrons have a magnetic dipole moment and act like tiny
magnets. An external magnetic field causes the electrons' spins to align
parallel to the field, causing a net attraction.
c) Magnetic susceptibility is small and positive.
d) The relative permeability is slightly greater than unity.
e) These materials are dependent of temperature; diamagnetic materials
obey Curie’s law.
Ferromagnetic materials
Ex- Fe, Co, Ni, Gd(Gadolinium), Dy(Dysprosium)
a) These are those substances which exhibit a spontaneous net magnetization at the
atomic level, even in the absence of an external magnetic field.
 b) The atoms of ferromagnetic substances have permanent dipole moment present in
domains. Atomic dipoles in ferromagnetic substances are oriented in the same
direction as the external magnetic field.
 The magnetic dipole moment is large and is in the direction of the magnetizing field.
c) Magnetic susceptibility has large positive value.
d) The relative permeability is greater than unity.
e) These materials are dependent of temperature; diamagnetic materials obey Curie’s
𝐶
law. ∝ 𝑇 where C is the Curie’s constant.
𝑇

f) Ferromagnetism is very important in industry and modern technology, and is the


basis for many electrical and electromechanical devices such as
electromagnets, electric motors, generators, transformers, and magnetic
storage such as tape recorders, and hard disks, and non-destructive testing of ferrous
materials.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 76


40 5

An electron of charge (-e) and mass m moves with speed ‘v’ around the nucleus (+ze)
of Hydrogen atom. As the charge particle revolves in a circular path then it behaves as
a magnetic dipole and the magnetic moment will be

𝑀 𝐼 𝐼𝜋 𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
𝜋 𝜋

Again, as per Bohr the angular momentum is


𝐿
𝐿 ⇒
𝜋 𝜋
Now the magnetic moment of electron will be
𝐿
𝑀 𝐿

𝑀
/𝐾
𝐿
This is known as Gyromagnetic ratio

𝐿
𝑀
𝜋 𝜋

This is called Bhor’s Magnetron

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 77


Bar magnet, bar magnet as an equivalent solenoid (qualitative treatment only), magnetic field
intensity due to a magnetic dipole (bar magnet) along its axis and perpendicular to its axis
(qualitative treatment only), torque on a magnetic dipole (bar magnet) in a uniform magnetic
field (qualitative treatment only), magnetic field lines. Magnetic properties of materials- Para-,
dia- and ferro - magnetic substances with examples, Magnetization of materials, effect of
temperature on magnetic properties.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 78


KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

KVS RO KOLKATA

SESSION 2023-24

STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS

CLASS-XII/XI PHYSICS

CHAPTER: 6-ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

Q CORE QUESTION MARK


NO. CONCEPT/
FOCUSED-
FORMULA/
TARGATED
THEOREM

SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)

1 Faraday‘s law Which of the following states that an emf is induced whenever there is a 1
statement change in the magnetic field linked with electric circuits?

(a)Lenz‘s Law

(b)Ohm‘s Law

(c)Faraday‘s Law of Electromagnetic Induction

(d)None of the above


2 Lenz‘s law Which of the following gives the polarity of the induced emf? 1
statement
(a)Biot-Savart Law

(b)Lenz‘s Law

(c)Ampere‘s circuital Law

(d)Fleming‘s right-hand Rule


3 Working Which of the following apparatus construction uses electromagnetic 1
principle of induction?
Generator
(a)Voltmeter

(b)Galvanometer

(c)Generator

(d)Electric Motor
4 Formula Which of the following factors is the self inductance associated with a 1
related to self coil is independent of?
induction of a
coil/solenoid (a)length

(b)current

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 79


(c) cross sectional area

(d) number of turns


5 Rule related to Which of the following rules is used to identify the direction of the 1
determine the current induced in a wire moving in a magnetic field?
direction of
induced (a)Ampere‘s Rule
current
(b)Fleming‘s Left-Hand Rule

(c)Fleming‘s Right-Hand Rule

(d)None of the above


6 Formula of In electromagnetic induction, the induced charge is independent of 1
induced (a) change of flux
charge (b) time.
(c) resistance of the coil
(d) None of these
7 Factors on An induced e.m.f. is produced when a magnet is plunged into a coil. 1
which The strength of the induced e.m.f. is independent of
magnetic flux (a) the strength of the magnet
depends & (b) number of turns of coil
hence the (c) the resistivity of the wire of the coil
formula of (d) speed with which the magnet is moved
induced emf
8 Concept of A coil of insulated wire is connected to a battery. If it is taken to 1
Faraday‘s galvanometer, its pointer is deflected, because
experiment (a) the induced current is produced
(b) the coil acts like a magnet
(c) the number of turns in the coil of the galvanometer are changed
(d) None of these
9 Concept of The self inductance of a coil is a measure of 1
self induction (a) electrical inertia
(b) electrical friction
(c) induced e.m.f.
(d) induced current
10 𝐿dI/dt When current in a coil changes from 5 A to 2 A in 0.1 s, average voltage 1
of 50 V is produced. The self-inductance of the coil is
(a) 1.67 H
(b) 6 H
(c) 3 H
(d) 0.67 H
11 A coil having 500 sq. loops of side 10 cm is placed normal to magnetic 1
𝑁
flux which increases at a rate of 1 T/s. The induced emf is
(a) 0.1 V
(b) 0.5 V
(c) 1 V
(d) 5 V

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 80


12 𝑁 The magnetic flux linked with a coil of N turns of area of cross section 1
A held with its plane parallel to the field B is
(a)NAB/2
(b)NAB
(c)NAB/4
(d) zero
13 Conservation Lenz’s law is a consequence of the law of conservation of 1
of energy (a) charge
related to (b) energy
lenz‘s law (c) induced emf
(d) induced current
14 Formula of If number of turns in primary and secondary coils is increased to two 1
mutual times each, the mutual inductance
inductance for (a) becomes 4 times
two (b) becomes 2 times
coils/solenoids (c) becomes A times
(d) remains unchanged 4
15 Lenz‘s law In the given figure current from A to B in the straight wire is 1
application decreasing. The direction of induced current in the loop is A

(a) clockwise
(b) anticlockwise
(c) changing
(d) nothing can be said
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)

Assertion: (A).
Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS
GIVEN IN ASSERTION AND REASON:
a)Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation
of A.
b)Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct
explanation of A.
c)Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 81


16 Faraday‘s Assertion : Induced emf will always occur whenever there is change in 1
Law magnetic flux.
Reason : Current always induces whenever there is change in magnetic
flux.
17 Lenz‘s Law Assertion : An induced current has a direction such that the magnetic 1
field due to the current opposes the change in the magnetic flux that
induces the current.
Reason : Above statement is in accordance with conservation of energy.
18 Concept of Assertion :In the phenomenon of mutual induction, self Induction of each of 1
self induction the coil persists.
& mutual
Reason: Self induction arises when strength of current in one coil changes.
induction
In mutual induction, current is changing in both the individual coils.
19 Application of Assertion : Acceleration of a magnet falling through a long solenoid 1
Faraday‘s decreases.
Law Reason : The induced current produced in a circuit always flow in such
direction that it opposes the change to the cause that produced it.
20 Lenz‘s law Assertion : Figure shows a horizontal solenoid connected to a 1
battery and a switch. A copper ring is placed on a smooth
surface, the axis of the ring being horizontal. As the switch is
closed, the ring will move away from the solenoid.

Reason : Induced emf in the ring, e=-dΦ/dt

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 Induced emf Why do birds fly off a high tension wire when the current is switched on? 1
& induced
current
22 Factors on Why a spark produced in the switch of a fan, when it is switched off? 1
which induced
emf depends
SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26]

23 Self A plot of magnetic flux (ϕ ) versus current (I) is shown in the figure for 2
inductance two inductors A and B. Which of the two has larger value of self
inductance? Justify your answer.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 82


24 Mutual How does the mutual inductance of a pair of coils change when 2
Inductance (i) distance between the coils is increased and
(ii) number of turns in the coils is increased
25 Lenz‘s law Two bar magnets are quickly moved towards a metallic loop connected 2
across a capacitor ‗C‘ as shown in the figure. Predict the polarity of the
capacitor.Support your answer.

26 Lenz‘s Law Predict the directions of induced current in metal rings 1 and 2 when 2
current I in the wire is steadily decreasing?

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF


THE CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]

27 Self Derive an expression for the self-inductance of a long air-cored solenoid 2


Inductance of length l and number of turns N.
28 Faraday‘s (i) When primary coil P is moved towards secondary coil S (as shown in 2
Law the figure) the galvanometer shows momentary deflection. What can be
done to have larger deflection in the galvanometer with the same battery?
(ii) State the related law.

29 Induced emf The magnetic flux is given by the equation ɸ = 3t2+ 4t+2 ; find induced 2
& induced emf at t=2sec.
current
SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33)

30 Induced Two identical loops, one of copper and the other of aluminium, are 3
current & rotated with the same angular speed in the same magnetic field. Compare
induced emf (i) the induced emf and (ii) the current produced in the two coils. Justify
your answer

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 83


31 Faraday‘s A jet plane is travelling towards west at a speed of 1800 km/h. 3
Law (i) Estimate voltage difference developed between the ends of the wing
having a span of 25 m if the earth‘s magnetic field at the location has a
magnitude of 5 × 10-4 T and dip angle is 30°.
(ii) How will the voltage developed be affected if the jet changes its
direction from west to north?
32 Self A short loop with an area of 4.0 cm2 is placed inside a long solenoid 3
inductance with 10 rounds per cm, normal to the solenoid’s axis. What is the
induced emf in the loop during a steady change in the
solenoid carrying current from 2.0 A to 4.0 A lasting for 0.5 seconds?
33 Lenz‘s Law State Lenz‘s Law related to electromagnetic induction. Show that Lenz‘s 3
law is in accordance with the law of conservation of energy.
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF
THE CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)

34 Self Define self-inductance of a coil. Show that magnetic energy required to 3


Inductance build up the current I in a coil of self inductance L is given by 0.5LI2.
35 Faraday‘s A coil of number of turns N, area A, is rotated at a constant angular 3
Law speed ω, in a uniform magnetic field B, and connected to a resistor R.
Deduce expressions for :
(i) Maximum emf induced in the coil.
(ii) Power dissipation in the coil.
36 Self The current through two inductors of self-inductance 15 mH and 25 mH 3
Inductance is increasing with time at the same rate. Draw graphs showing the
variation of the
(a) emf induced with the rate of change of current
(b) energy stored in each inductor with the current flowing through it.
Compare the energy stored in the coils, if the power dissipated in the
coils is the same.
SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASEDQUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 Magnetic field Electromagnetic induction is defined as the production of an 4


& magnetic electromotive force across an electric conductor in the changing
flux concepts magnetic field. The discovery of induction was done by Michael Faraday
in the year 1831. Electromagnetic induction finds many applications such
as in electrical components which includes transformers, inductors, and
other devices such as electric motors and generators.
(i)How to increase the energy stored in an inductor by four times?
(a) By doubling the current
(b) This is not possible
(c) By doubling the inductance
(d) By making current 1/2 times
(ii)What will be the acceleration of the falling bar magnet which
passes through the ring such that the ring is held horizontally and
the bar magnet is dropped along the axis of the ring?

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 84


(a) It depends on the diameter of the ring and the length of the magnet
(b) It is equal due to gravity
(c) It is less than due to gravity
(d) It is more than due to gravity
(iii)The magnetic field inside the solenoid is
(a) Non-Uniform and parallel to the axis
(b) Uniform and parallel to the axis
(c) Non-uniform and perpendicular to the axis
(d) Uniform and perpendicular to the axis
iv). How the magnetic field inside the solenoid depends upon the
number of turns?
(a) inversely proportional (b) directly proportional
(c) proportional to the square of number of turns (d) none of these
38 Self When a current I flows through a coil, flux linked with it is υ = LI, 4
Inductance where L is a constant known as self inductance of the coil. Any charge in
current sets up an induced emf in the coil. Thus, self inductance of a coil
is the induced emf set up in it when the current passing through it
changes at the unit rate. It is a measure of the opposition to the growth or
the decay of current flowing through the coil. Also, value of self
inductance depends on the number of turns in the solenoid, its area of
cross-section and the permeability of its core material.
(i) The inductance in a coil plays the same role as
(a) inertia in mechanics
(b) energy in mechanics
(c) momentum in mechanics
(d) force in mechanics
(ii)The inductance L of a solenoid depends upon its radius R as
(a) L ∝ R
(b) L ∝ 1/R
(c) L ∝ R2
(d) L ∝ R3
(iii) The unit of self-inductance is
(a) Weber ampere
(b) Weber-1 ampere
(c) Ohm second
(d) Farad
(iv) The induced emf in a coil of 10 henry inductance in which
current varies from 9 A to 4 A in 0.2
second is
(a) 200 V
(b) 250 V
(c) 300 V
(d) 350 V

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 85


SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39 Faraday‘s State Faraday‘s law of electromagnetic induction. Figure shows a 5


Law rectangular conductor PQRS in which the conductor PQ is free to move
in a uniform magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane of the paper.
The field extends from x = 0 to x = b and is zero for x > b. Assume that
only the arm PQ possesses resistance r.
When the arm PQ is pulled outward from x = 0 to x = 2b and is then
moved backward to x = 0 with constant speed v, obtain the expressions
for the flux and the induced emf. Sketch the variations of these quantities
with distance 0 ≤ x ≤ 2b.

40 Mutual a) Define mutual inductance between two long coaxial solenoids. 5


Inductance
b) Find out the expression for the mutual inductance of inner solenoid of
length l having the radius r1 and the number of turns n1 per unit length
due to the second outer solenoid of same length and n2 number of turns
per unit length.
c) A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance of 1.5 H. If the
current in one coil changes from 0 to 20 A in 0.5 s, what is the change of
flux linkage with the other coil?

ANSWER KEY:.

Q.NO. Answer MARK


SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]

1 (c) Faraday‘s law statement 1

2 (b) Lenz‘s law statement 1

3 (c) Working principle of Generator 1

4 (b) self inductance does not depend on current 1

5 (d)Fleming‘s Left-Hand Rule 1

6 (b) time independant 1

7 (c) the resistivity of the wire of the coil 1

8 (a) the induced current is produced 1

9 (a) electrical inertia 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 86


10 1

11 1

12 (d) zero; as θ=90o 1

13 (b) energy 1

14 (a) becomes 4 times 1

15 (b)By lenz‘s law, the induced current must produce flux to counter magnetic flux of 1
AB. So induced current is anticlockwise in the loop.
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)

16 (c) 1

17 (a) 1

18 (c) 1

19 (a) 1

20 (a) 1

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 When a high tension current is switched on, induced currents are set up in the body 1
system of the bird, the nerve and circulatory system being conducting.The bird
experience a repulsion and flies off.
22 The break of circuit is very sudden. A large induced emf is set up across the gap in the 1
switch due to which sparking occurs.
SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

23 Since ϕ = LI 2
∴ L = ϕ/I = slope
Slope of A is greater than slope of B
∴ Inductor A has larger value of self inductance than inductor B.
24 (i) Mutual inductance decreases‘, because flux linked with the secondary coil 2
decreases.
(ii) M=μ0n1n2Al, so when n1 and n2 increase, mutual inductance (M) increases.
25 When both magnets move towards loop, the A side plate of cL capacitor will be 2
positive while the lower plate B is negative, making the induced current in a clockwise
direction.

26 In metal ring 1, the induced current flows in Anticlockwise direction. 2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 87


In metal ring 2, the induced current flows in the Clockwise direction.
27 Consider a long solenoid of length l and radius r with r << 1 and having n turns per unit 2
length. If a current I flows through the coil, then the magnetic field inside the coil is
almost constant and is given by
B = µ0nI
Magnetic flux linked with each turn = BA = µ0nIA

28 (i) To have larger deflection in the galvanometer with the same battery, coil P has to be 2
moved faster towards S so that rate of change of magnetic flux is more.

(ii) The related law governing this phenomenon is Faraday‘s second law of
electromagnetic induction which states that induced emf is set up in a circuit when
magnetic flux linked with it changes. The magnitude of induced emf is proportional to
the rate of change of magnetic flux.
29 2
Total magnetic flux ϕ=3t2+4t+9

We know that,

The induced e .m. f

E = modulus [−(dϕ/dt)]

E = d/dt(3t2+4t+9)

E =6t+4

Now, the induced e.m.f at t=2 sec

E =6×2+4

E =16volt

Hence, the magnitude of induced e.m.f is 16 volt


SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

30 (i) Induced emf is same in both loops (B,A and ω are same for both loops) 3
(ii) As area A, length l and emf E are same for both loops but the resistivity of
copper is less than aluminium therefore current induced is larger in copper
loop.
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 88
31 3

(ii) When the jet changes its direction from west to north, the voltage developed will
not be affected.
32 The magnetic field produced inside the solenoid, 3
B = μ0nI
Suppose the area of the loop placed inside the solenoid is A then the magnetic flux
linked with the loop,
υ = BA
= μ0nIA
e is the induced e.m.f. produced due to change in current through the solenoid, then,
e = dυ / dt = d/dt [μ0nIA]
Or, e = -μ0 × n × A × dI/dt
Number of turns per unit length of the solenoid (n) = 10 turns cm-1 = 1000 turns m-1
A = 4cm2 = 4 × 10-4m2
dI/dt = 4-2/0.5 = 4 As-1
Therefore, e = -4π × 10-7 × 1000 × 4 × 10-4 × 4
= -2 × 10-6V.
33 Lenz's law: According to this law the direction of induced current in a closed circuit is always 3
such as to oppose the cause that produces it.
The induced EMF produces a current that opposes the change in flux and hence energy. As the
change starts, induction opposes and slows the change. If the induced EMF were in the same
direction as the change in flux, then that would give us free energy from no apparent source
violating conservation of energy. Thus Lenz's law is in accordance with the law of conservation of
energy.
34 The self-inductance of a coil may be defined as the induced emf set up in the coil due 3
to a unit rate of change of current through it.
Let I be the current through the inductor L at any instant t
The current rises at the rate dl/dt, so the induced

Work done against the induced emf in small time dt is

Total work done in building up the current from 0 to I is

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 89


This work done is stored as the magnetic field energy U in the inductor

35 3

36 3

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 (i) (a) By doubling the current 4

(ii) (c) It is less than due to gravity


(iii) (b) Uniform and parallel to the axis
(iv) (b) directly proportional
38 (i) (a) inertia in mechanics 4

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 90


(ii) (c) L ∝ R2
(iii) (c) Ohm second
(iv) (b) 250 V
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39 Faraday‘s law of electromagnetic induction: ―The magnitude of the induced emf in a 5


circuit is equal to the time rate of change of magnetic flux through the circuit‖

40 a) Mutual induction is the phenomenon of inducing emf in a coil due to the rate of 5
change of current in a nearby coil.

b) When a current I2 is set up through S2 (outer solenoid), it in turn sets up a magnetic


flux through S1. Let us denote it by ϕ 1, The corresponding flux linkage with solenoid
S1 is,

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 91


(Here N2 is total no. of turns with S2)
M21 is referred to as coefficient of mutual inductance of solenoid S2 with respect to
solenoid S1.
Thus, flux linkage with solenoid S2 is

Using equations (2) and (3), we get


M12 = M21 = M
If a medium of relative permeability (it had been present the mutual inductance would
be,

c) Given : M = 1.5 H, I1 = 0, I2 = 20 A, ∆t = 0.5 sec, dϕ = ?


Change in flux (dϕ) = MdI = M(I2 – I1) = 1.5 (20 – 0) = 30 Weber

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 92


KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

KVS RO KOLKATA

SESSION 2023-24

STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS

CLASS-XII PHYSICS

CHAPTER: 7 ALTERNATING CURRENT

Q CORE QUESTION MARK


NO. CONCEPT/
FOCUSED-
FORMULA/
TARGATED
THEOREM

SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)

1 BASIC Which of the following circuits exhibits maximum power dissipation? 1


CONCEPTS
a) Pure Inductive Circuit
b) Pure Capacitive Circuit
c) Pure Resistive Circuit
d) None of the above
2 BASIC What happens to the inductive reactance when the frequency of the AC 1
CONCEPTS supply is increased?
a) Increases
b) Decreases
c) Remains the same
d) Decreases inversely
3 BASIC What happens to the quality factor of an LCR circuit if the resistance is 1
CONCEPTS increased?

a) Increases
b) Decreases
c) Remains the same
d) None of the above
4 BASIC Which of the following statements is true about the LCR circuit connected to an 1
CONCEPTS AC source at resonance?

a) Voltage across R equals the applied voltage.


b) Voltage across R is zero.
c) Voltage across C is zero.
d) Voltage across L equals the applied voltage.
5 BASIC The power factor is one for which of the following? 1
CONCEPTS
a) Pure capacitor
b) Pure inductor
c) Pure resistor
d) All of the above
6 BASIC In general in an alternating current circuit 1
CONCEPTS
a) the average value of current is zero
b) the average value of square of the current is zero
c) average power dissipation is zero

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 93


d) the phase difference between voltage and current is zero
7 BASIC A capacitor has capacitance C and reactance X, if capacitance and frequency 1
CONCEPTS become double, then reactance will be

(a) 4X
(b) X/2
(c) X/4
(d) 2X
8 BASIC With increase in frequency of an A.C. supply, the impedance of an L-C-R series 1
CONCEPTS circuit

(a) remains constant


(b) increases
(c) decreases
(d) decreases at first, becomes minimum and then increases.

9 BASIC If an LCR series circuit is connected to an ac source, then at resonance the 1


CONCEPTS voltage across

(a) R is zero
(b) R equals the applied voltage
(c) C is zero
(d) L equals the applied voltage
10 BASIC Current in a circuit is wattless if 1
CONCEPTS
(a) inductance in the circuit is zero
(b) resistance in the circuit is zero
(c) current is alternating
(d) resistance and inductance both are zero

11 BASIC The graph between inductive reactance and frequency is 1


CONCEPTS
(a) parabola
(b) straight line
(c) hyperbola
(d) an arc of a circle
12 BASIC The transformation ratio in the step-up transformer is 1
CONCEPTS
(a) one
(b) greater than one
(c) less than one
(d) the ratio greater or less than one depends on the other factor
13 BASIC A transformer is employed to 1
CONCEPTS
(a) convert A.C. into D.C.
(b) convert D.C. into A.C.
(c) obtain a suitable A.C. voltage
(d) obtain a suitable D.C. voltage

14 BASIC A transformer is based on the principle of 1


CONCEPTS
(a) mutual induction
(b) self induction
(c) Ampere’s law
(d) X-ray crystallography
15 BASIC Quantity that remains unchanged in a transformer is 1
CONCEPTS
(a) voltage

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 94


(b) current
(c) frequency
(a) (d) None of these
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20) 1

Assertion: (A). 1

Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS
GIVEN IN ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation
of A.
b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct
explanation of A.
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.
16 BASIC Assertion : A capacitor is connected to a direct current source. Its reactance is 1
CONCEPTS infinite.

Reason : Reactance of a capacitor is given by χc = 1/ωC.

17 BASIC Assertion : Average value of ac over a complete cycle is always zero. 1


CONCEPTS
Reason: Average value of ac is always defined over half cycle.

18 BASIC Assertion : The voltage and current in a series AC circuit are given by V = 1
CONCEPTS V0sinωt and i = i0cosωt. The power dissipated in the circuit is zero.

Reason : Power in AC circuit is given by P=(V0I0 cosΦ) / 2

19 BASIC Assertion : When the frequency of the AC source in an LCR circuit equals the 1
CONCEPTS resonant frequency, the reactance of the circuit is zero, and so there is no
current through the inductor or the capacitor.

Reason : The net current in the inductor and capacitor is zero.

20 BASIC Assertion : In a purely inductive or capacitive circuit, the current is referred to 1


CONCEPTS as wattless current.

Reason: No power is dissipated in a purely inductive or capacitive circuit even


though a current is flowing in the circuit.

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 BASIC Why a d.c. voltmeter and d.c. ammeter cannot read a.c.? 1
CONCEPTS

22 BASIC What is meant by the statement that the current through an inductor lags 1
CONCEPTS behind the emf across it by π / 2 ?

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26] 2

23 Power Formula The instantaneous current and voltage of an a.c. circuit are given by I = 10 Sin
(300 t) A and V = 200 Sin (300 t) V. What is the power dissipation in the circuit?

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 95


24 Basic concepts A variable frequency AC source is connected to a capacitor. Will the 2
on AC displacement current change if the frequency of the AC source is decreased?

25 Basic concepts When an AC source is connected across an ideal inductor, show on a graph the 2
on AC nature of variation of the voltage and the current over one complete cycle.

Define the term ‘wattless current’

26 Basic concepts Mention the two characteristic properties of the material suitable for making 2
on core of a transformer.
Transformer

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF


THE CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]

27 Xc vs ω graph Plot a graph showing variation of capacitive reactance with the change in 2
the frequency of the AC source.[ practice other graphs also like XL vs ω
graph etc]

28 Principal of State the principle of working of a transformer. Can a transformer be 2


Transformer used to step up or step down a d.c. voltage? Justify your Answer.

29 Basic of A.C Why is the use of a.c. voltage preferred over d.c. voltage? Give two 2
reasons.

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33)

30 Application of The figure shows a series LCR circuit connected to a variable frequency 3
LCR circuit 200 V source with L = 50 mH, C = 80 µF and R = 40 Ω.
Theory Determine
(i) the source frequency which derives the circuit in resonance;
(ii) the quality factor (Q) of the
circuit.

31 Application of A circuit containing an 80 mH inductor and a 250 µF capacitor in series 3


LCR circuit connected to a 240 V, 100 rad/s supply. The resistance of the circuit is
Theory negligible.

(i) Obtain rms value of current.

(ii) What is the total average power consumed by the circuit ?

32 Application of An inductor 200mH capacitor 500 F and a resistor of 10 ohm are connected in 3
LCR circuit series with a 100V variable frequency AC source .Calculate
Theory
a)the frequency at which the power factor of the circuit is unity.

b)Calculate the amplitude at this frequency.

c)Q factor

33 Application of In the given circuit, calculate 3


LCR circuit (a) the capacitance of the capacitor, if the power factor of the circuit is
Theory unity,
(b) the Q-factor of this circuit.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 96


What is the significance of the Q-factor in a.c. circuit? Given the angular
frequency of the a.c. source to be 100/s. Calculate the average power
dissipated in the circuit.

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF


THE CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)

34 Application of In a series LCR circuit connected to an ac source of variable frequency 3


LCR circuit and voltage V = Vm sin ωt has been used, draw a plot showing the
Theory variation of current (I) with angular frequency (ω) for two different values
of resistance R1 and R2 (R1 > R2). Write the condition under which the
phenomenon of resonance occurs. For which value of the resistance out
of the two curves, a sharper resonance is produced?

35 Theory on LCR Derive the relationship between the peak and the rms value of current in 3
Circuit an a.c. circuit.

36 Theory on Describe briefly, with the help of a labelled diagram, working of a step-up 3
Transformer transformer. A step-up transformer converts a low voltage into high
voltage. Does it not violate the principle of conservation of energy?
Explain.

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 Basic Resonant Series LCR Circuit. When the frequency of ac supply is such that the 4
application on inductive reactance and capacitive reactance become equal, the impedance of
LCR Circuit the series LCR circuit is equal to the ohmic resistance in the circuit. Such a
series LCR circuit is known as resonant series LCR circuit and the frequency of
the ac supply is known as resonant frequency. Resonance phenomenon is
exhibited by a circuit only if both L and C are present in the circuit. We cannot
have resonance in a RL or RC circuit. A series LCR circuit with L = 0.12 H, C = 480
nF, R = 23 Ω is Connect to a 230 V variable frequency supply.

(i) Find the value of source for which current amplitude is maximum.

(a) 222.32 Hz

(b) 550.52 Hz

(c) 663.48 Hz

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 97


(d) 770 Hz

(ii) The value of maximum current is

(a) 14.14 A

(b) 22.52 A

(c) 50.25 A

(d) 47.41 A

(iii) The value of maximum power is

(a) 2200 W

(b) 2299.3 W

(c) 5500 W

(d) 4700 W

(iv) What is the Q-factor of the given circuit?

(a) 25 A

(b) 42.21 A

(c) 35.42 A

(d) 21.74 A

38 Basic A transformer is essentially an a.c. device. It cannot work on d.c. It changes 4


application of alternating voltages or currents. It does not affect the frequency of a.c. It is
Transformer based on the phenomenon of mutual induction. A transformer essentially
theory and consists of two coils of insulated copper wire having different number of turns
concepts and wound on the same soft iron core.

The number of turns in the primary and secondary coils of an ideal transformer
are 2000 and 50 respectively. The primary coil is connected to a main supply of
120 V and secondary coil is connected to a bulb of resistance 0.6Ω

(i) The value of voltage across the secondary coil is

(a) 5V (b) 2V (c) 3 V (d) 10 V

(ii) The value of current in the bulb is

(a) 7 A (b) 15 A (c) 3 A (d) 5 A

(iii) The value of current in primary coil is

(a) 0.125 A (b) 2.52 A (c) 1.51 A (d) 3.52 A

(iv) Power in primary coil is

(a) 20W (b) 5W (c) 10 W (d) 15W

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39 A.C generator Draw a sketch showing the basic elements of an a.c. generator. State its 5
principle and explain briefly its working.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 98


40 Theory of LCR A series LCR circuit is connected to an ac source. Using the phasor diagram, 5
Circuit derive the expression for the impedance of the circuit. Plot a graph to show the
variation of current with frequency of the source, explaining the nature of its
variation.

ANSWER KEY:

Q.NO. Answer MARK


SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]

1 c) Pure Resistive Circuit 1

2 (a) increases 1

3 b) Decreases 1

4 (a) R equals the applied voltage. 1

5 c) Pure resistor 1

6 a) the average value of current is zero 1

7 c) X/4 1

8 d) decreases at first, becomes minimum and then increases 1

9 b)R equals the applied voltage 1

10 b)resistance in the circuit is zero 1

11 b) straight line 1

12 b)greater than one 1

13 c) obtain a suitable A.C. voltage 1

14 (a) mutual induction 1

15 c)frequency 1

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)

16 a 1

17 b 1

18 a 1

19 d 1

20 a 1

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 The average value of a.c. over a cycle is zero. So, a d.c. voltmeter/ammeter will show zero 1
reading with alternating voltage/current.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 99


22 This means that in an inductive a.c. circuit whichever value emf attains, current attains a 1
similar value a quarter of cycle later. For example, if emf attains its maximum value at t =
0, then current attains its maximum value at t = T / 4, and so on.

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

23 2

24 On decreasing the frequency of AC source, reactance, xC=1/ωC will increase, 2


which will lead to decrease in conduction current. In this case
ID = IC
Hence, displacement current will decrease.

25 2

Wattless current is that component of the circuit current due to which the power
consumed in the circuit is zero.

26 Characteristic properties of material suitable for core of a transformer : 2

 It should have high permeability


 It should have low hysteresis loss.
 It should have low coercivity/retentivity.
 It should have high resistivity. (Any two)

27 Graph showing a variation of xc capacitive reactance with the change in frequency 2


of AC source.

28 Transformer works on the principle of mutual induction, i.e., when a 2


changing current is passed through one of the two inductively coupled coils,
an induced emf is set up in the other coil.

No, transformer cannot be used to step up or step down a d.c. voltage

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 100


because d.c. voltage cannot produce a change in magnetic flux.

29 A.C. voltage is preferred over D.C. voltage because of following reasons : 2

1. it can be stepped-up or stepped-down by a transformer.

2. carrying losses are much less.

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

30 3

31 3

32 3

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 101


33 3

34 (a) Condition for resonance to occur is XL = XC, and Z = R. 3


(b) Sharper resonance is produced for R2
(c) The Q-factor (quality factor) of series resonant circuit is defined as the ratio of
the voltage developed across the inductance of capacitance at resonance to the
impressed voltage, which is the voltage applied across the R.

35 R.M.S. value of current say I = Im sin ωt is given by 3

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 102


where [Im is the peak value of current]

36 The supply of ac to the primary will bring a varying flux in the secondary causing 3
emf.

in the secondary flux will be more than the primary as the condition NS > NP is
satisfied. Production of high voltage does not violate the law of conservation of
energy as the current will be reduced in the process.

As VS > VP with NS > NP, IS will become less than IP.

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 i)C ii)A iii)B iv)D 4

38 4

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 103


39 (a) Principle of A.C. generator : The working of an a.c. generator is based 5
on the principle of electromagnetic induction. When a closed coil is rotated
in a uniform magnetic field with its axis perpendicular to the magnetic field,
the magnetic flux linked with the coil changes and an induced emf and
hence a current is set up in it.

(b) Let N = number of turns in the coil


A = Area of face of each turn
B = magnitude of the magnetic field
θ = angle which normal to the coil makes with field B at any instant
ω = the angular velocity with which coil rotates

The magnetic flux linked with the coil at any instant f will be,
ϕ = NAB cos θ = NAB cos ωt
By Faraday’s flux rule, the induced emf is given by,

When a load of resistance R is connected across the terminals, a current I flows in


the external circuit.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 104


40 5

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 105


KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN
KVS RO KOLKATA
SESSION 2023-24
STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS
CLASS-XII/XI PHYSICS
CHAPTER: 8 ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

Q CORE QUESTION M
NO. CONCEPT/ A
FOCUSED- R
FORMULA/ K
TARGATED
THEOREM
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)
1 In electromagnetic waves the phase difference between electric and 1
magnetic field vectors are
(a) zero
(b) 𝜋/4
(c) 𝜋/2
(d) π
2 Which of the following has minimum wavelength? 1
(a) Blue light
(b) γ-rays
(c) infrared rays
(d) microwave
3 The correct option, if speeds of gamma rays, X-rays and microwave are Vg, 1
Vx an Vm respectively will be.
(a) Vg > Vx > Vm
(b) Vg < Vx < Vm
(c) Vg > Vx > Vm
(d) Vg = Vx = Vm
4 Which of the following has maximum penetrating power? 1
(a) Ultraviolet radiation
(b) Microwaves
(c) γ-rays
(d) Radio waves
5 Electromagnetic waves travelling in a medium having relative permeability 1
μr = 1.3 and relative permittivity Er = 2.14. The speed of electromagnetic
waves in medium must be
(a) 1.8 × 108 ms-1
(b) 1.8 × 104ms1
(c) 1.8 × 106ms1
(d) 1.8 × 10² ms-1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 106


6 The quantity √ 0𝜀0 represents 1
(a) speed of sound
(b) speed of light in vacuum
(c) speed of e.m. waves
(d) inverse of speed of light in vacuum
7 If ⃗ and ⃗ represent electric and magnetic field vector of the 1
electromagnetic waves then the direction of propagation of the em wave is
that of

8 The condition under which a microwave over heats up a food item 1


containing water molecules most efficiently is
(a) The frequency of the microwaves must match the resonant frequency of
the water molecules.
(b) The frequency of the microwaves has no relation with natural frequency of
the water molecules.
(c) Microwaves are heat waves, so always produce heating.
(d) Infrared waves produce heating in a microwave oven.
9 Waves in decreasing order of their wavelength are 1
(a) X-rays, infrared rays, visible rays, radio waves
(b) radio waves, visible rays, infrared rays, X-rays.
(c) radio waves, infrared rays, visible rays, X-rays.
(d) radio waves, ultraviolet rays, visible rays, X-rays.
10 The electric field associated with an e.m wave in vacuum is given by ⃗ =40 1
cos (kz – 6 × 108t) ⃗ , where E, Z and t are in volt/m, metre and seconds
respectively. The value of wave vector K is
(a) 2 m-1
(b) 0.5 m-1
(c) 6 m-1
(d) 3 m-1
11 The oscillating magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given as 1
By = (8 × 10-6) sin [2 × 1011t+ 300πx] T, wavelength of the em wave is
(a) 0.80 cm
(b) 1 × 103m
(c) 2 × 10-2cm
(d) 0.67 cm
12 An electromagnetic wave can be produced, when charge is 1
(a) moving with a constant velocity
(b) moving in a circular orbit
(c) falling in an electric field
(d) both (b) and (c)
13 Which of the following statement is false for the properties of 1
electromagnetic waves?
(a) Both electric and magnetic field vectors attain the maxima and minima at
the same place and same time.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 107


(b) The energy in electromagnetic waves is divided equally between electric
and magnetic field vectors.
(c) Both electric and magnetic field vectors are parallel to each other and
perpendicular to the direction of propagation of wave.
(d) These waves do not require any material medium for propagation.
14 Which of the following has/have zero average value in a plane 1
electromagnetic wave?
(a) Both magnetic and electric fields
(b) Electric field only
(c) Magnetic field only
(d) None of these
15 A linearly polarized electromagnetic wave given as E = E0 cos (kz – ωt) is
incident normally on a perfectly reflecting infinite wall at z = a. Assuming
that the material of the wall is optically inactive, the reflected wave will be
given as
(a) Er = -E0 cos (kz – ωt).
(b) Er = E0 cos (kz + ωt).
(c) Er = -E0 cos (kz + ωt).
(d) Er = E0 sin (kz – ωt).
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16- 1
20)
Assertion: (A). 1
Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS GIVEN
IN ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct explanation
of A.
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.
16 Assertion : The electromagnetic wave is transverse in nature. 1
Reason : Electromagnetic wave propagates parallel to the direction of electric
and magnetic fields.
17 Assertion : Electromagnetic wave are transverse in nature. 1
Reason : The electric and magnetic fields in electromagnetic waves are
perpendicular to each other
and the direction of propagation.
18 Which of the following is/are true for electromagnetic waves? 1
I. They transport energy.
II. They have momentum.
III. They travel at different speeds in air depending on their frequency.
(a) I and III (b) II only
(c) I, II and III (d) I and II

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 108


19 Assertion : Infrared radiation plays an important role in maintaining the 1
average temperature of earth.
Reason : Infrared radiations are sometimes referred to as heat waves
20 Assertion :The basic difference between various types of electromagnetic 1
waves lies in their wavelength or frequencies.
Reason : Electromagnetic waves travel through vacuum with the same speed.
SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING
QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)
21 The amplitude of an electromagnetic wave in vacuum is doubled with no 1
other changes made to the wave. As a result of this doubling of the
amplitude, which of the following statements are incorrect?
I. The speed of wave propagation chages only
II. The frequency of the wave changes only
III. The wavelength of the wave changes only
(a) I and II (b) II and III
(c) I and III (d) I, II and III
22 Select the correct statement(s) from the following. 1
I. Wavelength of microwaves is greater than that of ultraviolet rays.
II. The wavelength of infrared rays is lesser than that of ultraviolet rays.
III. The wavelength of microwaves is lesser than that of infrared rays
IV. Gamma ray has shortest wavelength in the electromagnetic spectrum
(a) I and II (b) II and III
(c) III and IV (d) I and IV
SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26] 2
23 State two properties of electromagnetic waves. How can we show that EM
waves carry
momentum?
24 (a) An EM wave is travelling in a medium with a velocity vector v = v î. 2
Draw a sketch showing the propagation of the EM wave, indicating the
direction of the oscillating electric and magnetic fields.
(b) How are the magnitudes of the electric and magnetic fields related to the
velocity of the EM
wave?

25 (a) How does oscillating charge produce electromagnetic waves? 2


(b) Sketch a schematic diagram depicting oscillating electric and magnetic
fields of an em wave
propagating along + z-direction.
26 (i) How are infrared waves produced? Write their one important use. 2
(ii) The thin ozone layer on top of the stratosphere is crucial for human
survival. Why?
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING
OUTCOME OF THE CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 109


27 (i) Which segment of electromagnetic waves has highest frequency? How are 2
these waves
produced? Give one use of these waves.
(ii) Which EM waves lie near the high frequency end of visible part of EM
spectrum? Give its one
use. In what way this component of light has harmful effects on humans?
28 Identify the electromagnetic waves whose wavelengths vary as 2
(a) 10–12m < λ < 10–8 m
(b) 10–3 m < λ < 10–1 m
Write one use for each.
29 Explain briefly how electromagnetic waves are produced by an oscillating 2
charge. How is the frequency of EM waves produced related to that of the
oscillating charge?

ANSWER KEY :
Q.NO. Answer MARK
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]
1 (a) Electric and magnetic field vectors always vary in same phase. 1
2 (b) γ-rays have maximum frequency so minimum wavelength among electromagnetic 1
waves.
3 (d) All electromagnetic waves travel with the speed of light in space. 1
4 (c) γ-rays have maximum frequency and energy of proton, therefore maximum 1
penetrating power.
5 (a) 1.8 × 108 ms-1 1
6 (d) inverse of speed of light in vacuum 1
7 (c) ⃗ × ⃗ 1
8 (a) When frequency of microwave matches with frequency of water molecules i.e., 1
resonant condition. Maximum energy is transferred to water molecules as their K.E.
energy.
9 (c) radio waves, infrared rays, visible rays, X-rays. 1
10 (a) Wave vector, = =6×108/3×108=2 m−1 1
11 (d) wavelength 𝜆=2𝜋300𝜋=1150m = 0.67 cm 1
12 (d) both (b) and (c) 1
13 (c) Both electric and magnetic field vectors are parallel to each other and perpendicular 1
to the direction of propagation of wave.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 110


14 (a) Both magnetic and electric fields 1
15 (b) Er = E0 cos (kz + ωt). 1
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)
16 (c) This electromagnetic wave contains sinusoidally time varying electric and magnetic 1
field which act perpendicular to each other as well as at right angle to the direction of
propagation of waves, so electromagnetic waves are transverse in nature.
Electromagnetic wave propagate in the perpendicular direction to both fields.
17 (a) Transverse waves are those waves in which the particles of the medium oscillate 1
perpendicular to the direction of wave propagation.
18 (c) I, II and III 1
19 (b) Infrared radiation help to maintain the earth warmth through the greenhouse effect. 1
Incoming visible light which passes relatively easily through the atmosphere is
absorbed by the earth‘s surface and re-radiated as infrared radiation. The radiation is
trapped by greenhouse gases such as carbon dioxide and water vapour and they heat up
and heat their surroundings.
20 (a) The basic difference between various types of electromagnetic waves lies in their 1
wavelengths or frequencies since all of them travel through vacuum with the same
speed. Consequently, the waves differ considerably in their mode of interaction with
matter.
SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN
NO 21-22)
21 (d) I, II and III 1
22 (d) I and IV 1
SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)
23 Answer: Properties of electromagnetic waves: 2
(i) Transverse nature
(ii) Does not get deflected by electric or magnetic fields
(iii) Same speed in vacuum for all waves
(iv) No material medium required for propagation
(v) They get refracted, diffracted and polarised
Electric charges present on a plane, kept normal to the direction of propagation of an
EM wave can be set and sustained in motion by the electric and magnetic field of the
electromagnetic wave. The charges thus acquire energy and momentum from the
waves.
24 Answer: 2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 111


25 Answer: (a) An oscillating charge produces an oscillating electric field in space, which 2
produces an oscillating magnetic field. The oscillating electric and magnetic fields
regenerate each other, and this results in the production of em waves in space.
(b) Electric field is along x-axis and magnetic field is along y-axis.

26 (i) Infrared waves are produced by hot bodies and molecules. Important use: 2
(a) To treat muscular strains (b) To reveal the secret writings on the ancient walls (c)
For producing dehydrated fruits (d) Solar heater (e) Solar cooker (Any one) (ii) Ozone
layer protects us from harmful UV rays.
27 (i) Gamma rays have the highest frequency. These are produced during nuclear 2
reactions and also emitted by radioactive nuclei. They are used in medicine to destroy
cancer cells.
(ii) Ultraviolet rays lie near the high frequency end of visible part of EM spectrum.
They are used to sterlise drinking water and surgical instruments. Exposure to UV
radiation induces the production of more melanin, causing tanning of the skin.
28 (a) X-rays: Used as a diagnostic tool in medicine and as a treatment for certain forms of 2
cancer.
(b) Microwaves: Used in radar systems for aircraft navigation.
29 An oscillating or accelerated charge is supposed to be source of an electromagnetic 2
wave. An oscillating charge produces an oscillating electric field in space which further
produces an oscillating magnetic field which in turn is a source of electric field. These
oscillating electric and magnetic field, hence, keep on regenerating each other and an
electromagnetic wave is produced The frequency of EM wave = Frequency of
oscillating charge.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 112


KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

KVS RO KOLKATA

SESSION 2023-24

STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS

CLASS-XII PHYSICS

CHAPTER: 9 RAY OPTICS AND OPTICAL


INSTRUMENT

Q CORE QUESTION MARK


NO. CONCEPT/
FOCUSED-
FORMULA/
TARGATED
THEOREM
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)

1 Identification In the given figure 1


of normal for ,the angle of
spherical incidence i is
surface and
(a) i=90o
angle of
incidence. (b) 45o < i <90o

(c) 0o < i < 45o

(d) i=0o

2 Concept of A mirror produces +1 times magnified image. 1


magnification.
(a) The mirror is plane mirror
(b) The mirror is concave mirror.

(c) The mirror is convex mirror.


(d) The image is real.

3 Image An object is held at the principal focus of a concave lens of focal length f. 1
formation.
(a) The image will be formed at infinity.
(b) The image will be formed first principal focus and optical centre.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 113


(c) The image will be formed is real.
(d) The image will be formed beyond twice of
4 Magnification A concave mirror forms three times magnified real image of an object placed in 1
and its relation front of it.. The object must be
with object
(a) between centre of curvature and principal focus.
and image
distance. (b) at centre of curvature.

(c) at a point beyond centre of curvature.

(d) between pole of mirror and principal focus.

5 Concept of A ray incident on the plane mirror makes angle 30o with the mirror. The ray 1
angle of deviates through an angle—
deviation
(a) 30o (b) 120o (c) 90o (d) 60o

6 Optical density For the same value of angle incidence, the angles of refraction in four 1
media A, B, C and D are 15°, 25°, 35° and 45°respectively. In which
medium would the velocity of light be minimum?
(a) A (b) Bo (c) C (d) D

7 Refraction Shashank is studying refraction of light through a triangular prism of angle A. 1


through prism He observes angle of incidence ‘I’, angle of emergence ‘e’ and angle of
deviation δ. Which of the correctly relates them?

(a) i-e=A+ δ

(b) i- δ=A-e

(c) i+δ=A+e

(d) i+A= e+ δ

8 Identification The the ray diagram given below AB is a---- 1


of lens by
recalling ray
diagram.

(a) concave mirror.

(b) concave lens.

(c) convex lens.

(d) convex mirror.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 114


9 Dependence of Which of the following 1
focal length of options is correct
lens on according to the given
medium. ray diagram

(a) >
(b) <
(c) =
(d) ray diagram is not correct in any case.

10 Practical based A student wants to verify the focal length of a concave lens of power – 4 D 1
using convex lens on optical bench. The focal length of suitable convex lens
may be

(a) 50 cm

(b) 35 cm

(c) 15 cm

(d) 40 cm

11 refraction A glass slab of thickness t and refractive index µ is kept on a point 1


marked on a sheet of paper. The shift in the position of the point as
observed from above is

(a) (b) t( )

(c) t(µ -1) (d) t( )

12 Relation Which of the following quantities related to a lens does not depend on the wavelength 1
between of the incident light ?
wavwlength (a) Refractive index (b) Focal length (c) Power (d) Radii of curvature
and refractive
index

13. Lens maker’s The radius of curvature of the curved surface of a plano-convex
formula
lens is 20 cm. If the refractive index of the material of the lens be

1.5, it will

(a) act as a convex lens only for the objects that lie on its curved side.

(b) act as a concave lens for the objects that lie on its curved side.

(c) act as a convex lens irrespective of the side on which the object lies.

(d) act as a concave lens irrespective of side on which the object lies.

14 Lens formula An object approaches a convergent lens from the left of the lens with a uniform 1
speed 5 m/s and stops at the focus. The image

(a) moves away from the lens with an uniform speed 5 m/s.

(b) moves away from the lens with an uniform accleration.

(c) moves away from the lens with a non-uniform acceleration.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 115


(d) moves towards the lens with a non-uniform acceleration.

15 Ray diagram. 1
The direction of ray of light incident
on a concave mirror is shown

by PQ while directions in which the


ray would travel after reflection

is shown by four rays marked 1, 2, 3


and 4

(Fig ). Which of the four rays


correctly shows the direction of
reflected ray?

(a) 1

(b) 2

(c) 3

(d) 4

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20) 1

For question numbers 16 to 20 two statements are given-one labelled 1


Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to
these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.

a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A

b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A

c) A is true but R is false

d) A is false and R is true

16 Nature of Assertion (A): A convex mirror cannot form real images of real objects. 1
image Reason (R): Convex mirror converges the parallel rays that are incident
on it.
17 microscope Assertion(A): A convex lens of focal length 30 cm can’t be used as a 1
simple microscope in normal setting.
Reason (R): For normal setting, the angular magnification of simple
microscope is M=D/f
18 Dependence of Assertion(A): A convex lens can be a diverging lens 1
focal length on
Reason (R): Behaviour of lens depends on the medium in which it is used.
medium

19 Mirror Assertion(A): Mirror equation cannot be applied to plane mirror. 1


equation
Reason (R): Radius of curvature of plane mirror is infinity.

20 refraction Assertion(A): When a ray of light goes from rarer to denser medium it bends away 1
from the normal.

Reason (R): The ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence


to the sine of angle of refraction is constant.

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 Ray diagram The distance of an object from a spherical mirror is equal to the focal length of the 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 116


mirror. Then the image:

(a) must be at infinity (b) may be at infinity (c) may be at the focus (d) none

22 Magnification A concave mirror of focal length 20 1


and image cm is cut into two parts from the
formation middle and the two parts are
moved perpendicularly by a
distance 1 mm from the previous
principal axis AB. The distance
between the images formed by the
two pars is

(a) 2 mm (b) 6 mm (c 3 mm (d) 4 mm


SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26]

23 Refractive Define refractive index of a transparent medium. 2


index
A ray of light passes through a triangular prism. Plot a graph
showing the variation of the angle of deviation with the angle of
incidence.
24 Ray diagram. An object AB is kept in front of a concave mirror as shown in the figure. 2

(i) Complete the ray diagram showing the image formation of the object.
(ii) How will the position and intensity of the image be affected if the
lower half of the mirror’s reflecting surface is painted black?
25 Focal length of A convex lens of focal length is kept in contact with a concave lens of 2
combination focal length . Find the focal length of the combination.
26 telescope An astronomical telescope uses an objective lens of focal length 15 m and 2
eye-lens of focal length 1 cm. What is the angular magnification of the
telescope? If this telescope is used to view moon, what is the diameter of
the image of moon formed by the objective lens? (Diameter of moon 35
106 m and radius of lunar orbit 38 108 m).
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF
THE CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]

27 Total internal What is critical angle in relation to the phenomenon of total internal reflection? 2
reflection Mention two necessary conditions for total internal reflection to take place?

28 Refraction A ray of light passes through an equilateral glass prism such that the angle 2
through prism. of incidence is equal to the angle of emergence and each of these angles is

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 117


equal to 3/4 of angle of prism. Find the angle of deviation.

29 Reletion Calculate the speed of light in a medium whose critical angle is 45 . 2


between Does critical angle for a given pair of media depend on the wavelength of
critical angle incident light? Give reason.
and refractive
index.

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33)

30 Lens formula An illuminated object and a screen are placed 90 cm apart. Determine the 3
focal length and nature of the lens required to produce a clear image on
the screen, twice the size of the object.
31 Lens maker’s A convex lens made up of glass of refractive index 1.5 is dipped, in turn, 3
formula in (i) a medium of refractive index 1.65, (ii) a medium of refractive index
1.33.
(a) Will it behave as a converging or a diverging lens in the two cases?
(b) How will its focal length change in the two media?

32 Total internal In the figure given below, light rays of blue, green, red wavelengths are 3
refletion incident on an isosceles right-angled prism.

Explain with reason, which ray of light will be transmitted through the
face AC. The refractive indices of the prism for red, green, blue light are
139, 1424, 1476 respectively.
33 telescope (i) Draw a neat labelled ray diagram of an astronomical telescope in 3
normal adjustment. Explain briefly its working.
(ii) An astronomical telescope uses two lenses of powers 10 D and 1 D.
What is its magnifying power in normal adjustment?
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF
THE CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)

34 Lens formula You are given three lenses 𝐿 , 𝐿 and 𝐿 each of focal length 20 cm. An 3
object is kept at 40 cm in front of L1, as shown.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 118


The final real image is formed at the focus ‘I’ of 𝐿 . Find the separations
between 𝐿 , 𝐿 and 𝐿 .

35 Combination A convex lens of focal length 20 cm is placed coaxially with a convex 3


of lens and mirror of radius of curvature 20 cm. The two are kept at 15 cm from each
mirror. other. A point object lies 60 cm in front of the convex lens. Determine the
position of the image formed.
36 Combination A convex lens of focal length f1 is kept in contact with a concave lens of 3
of lens focal length f2 . Find the focal length of the combination.
SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 Total internal Sparking Brilliance of Diamond: 4


reflection
The total internal reflection of
the light is used in polishing
diamonds to create a
sparking brilliance. By
polishing the diamond with
specific cuts, it is adjusted
the most of the light rays
approaching the surface are
incident with an angle of
incidence more than critical
angle. Hence, they suffer
multiple reflections and
ultimately come out of
diamond from the top. This
gives the diamond a sparking brilliance.

1. Light cannot easily escape a diamond without multiple internal


reflections. This is because:
a) Its critical angle with reference to air is too large
b) Its critical angle with reference to air is too small
c) The diamond is transparent
d) Rays always enter at angle greater than critical angle

2. The critical angle for a diamond is 24.4o. Then its refractive index is-
a) 2.42
b) 0.413
c) 1
d) 1.413

3. The basic reason for the extraordinary sparkle of suitably cut


diamond is that
a) It has low refractive index
b) It has high transparency

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 119


c) It has high refractive index
d) It is very hard

4. A diamond is immersed in a liquid with a refractive index greater than


water. Then the critical angle for total internal reflection will
a) will depend on the nature of the liquid
b) decrease
c) remains the same
d) increase

38 Optical A number of optical devices and instruments have been 4


instrument
designed and developed such as periscope, binoculars,
microscopes and telescopes utilising the reflecting and
refracting properties of mirrors, lenses and prisms. Most of
them are in common use. Our knowledge about the formation
of images by the mirrors and lenses is the basic requirement
for understanding the working of these devices.
(i) Why the image formed at infinity is often considered most
suitable for viewing. Explain
(ii) In modern microscopes multicomponent lenses are used for
both the objective and the eyepiece. Why?
(iii) Write two points of difference between a compound
microscope and an astronomical telescope
OR
(iii) Write two distinct advantages of a reflecting type
telescope over a refracting type telescope.
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39 Refraction (i) Draw a ray diagram showing the geometry of formation of image of a 5
through point object situated on the principal axis and on the convex side of a
spherical spherical surface of radius of curvature R. Taking the rays as incident
surface. from rarer medium of refractive index to a denser medium of
refractive index , derive the relation

, where symbols have their usual meaning.

(ii) Explain briefly how the focal length of a convex lens changes with
increase in wavelength of incident light.
(iii) What happens to the focal length of convex lens when it is immersed
in water? Refractive index of the material of lens is greater than that of
water.
40 Microscope. Draw a labelled ray diagram of a compound microscope for normal 5
adjustment and write an expression for its magnifying power.
The focal length of the objective and eye-lens of a compound microscope
are 2 cm, 625 cm respectively. The distance between the lenses is 15 cm.
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 120
(i) How far from the objective lens, will the objec be kept, so as to obtain
the final image at the near point of the eye? (ii) Also calculate its
magnifying power.

ANSWER KEY:

Q.NO Answer MARK


.
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]

1 (d) i=0o 1

2 (a) The mirror is plane mirror 1

3 (b) The image will be formed first principal focus and optical centre. 1

4 (a) between centre of curvature and principal focus. 1

5 (d) 60o 1

6 (a) A 1

7 (b) i- δ=A-e 1

8 (b) concave lens. 1

9 (a) > 1

10 (c) 15 cm 1

11 (d) t( ) 1

12 (d) Radii of curvature 1

13 (c) act as a convex lens irrespective of the side on which the object lies. 1

14 (c) moves away from the lens with a non-uniform acceleration. 1

15 (b) 2 1

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)

16 c)A is true but R is false 1

17 b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A 1

18 a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A 1

19 d) A is false and R is true 1

20 d) A is false and R is true 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 121


SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 (b) may be at infinity 1

22 (a) 2 mm 1

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

23 Refractive index of the medium is defined as the ratio of speed of light in vacuum to 2
speed of light in medium.

24 2

Position of image will not change , however the intensity of the image will become half if
half of the mirror is painted black.

25 Consider two lenses A and B of 2


focal length f1 and f2 placed in
contact with each other. Let the
object be placed at a point O
beyond the focus of the first lens A
. The first lens produces

an image at I1. Since image I1 is


real, it serves as a virtual object for
the second lens B, producing the
final image at I.

For the image formed by the first lens A, we get

----------- (i)

For the image formed by the first lens B, we get

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 122


------------ (ii)

Adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get

If the two lens-system is regarded as equivalent to a single lens of focal length f, we have

Hence

26 2

27 The angle of incidence in the denser medium for which the angle of refraction is 90o is called 2
critical angle.

Two conditions for total internal reflection are –

(i) the ray must travel from denser to rarer medium.

(ii) the angle of incidence must be greater than critical angle.

28 Angle of prism (A)= 60o 2

I=e= 60o= 45o

As,

δ=i+e-A

δ= 45o+45o-60o=30o

29 Critical angle(C) = 45 . 2

Speed in medium (v)=?

As

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 123


=


= m/s

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

30 Convex lens will be used. 3

m= = =
𝑥
 𝑥
𝑥
Now,

As,



31 (a) (i) the lens will behave as diverging lens 3

(ii) the lens will behave as converging lens.

(b) In air, =1.5, =1

= ( )

= ( )

= ×
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 124
f=
=1.5, =1.65

= ( )

= ( )

= ×

f=
=1.5, =1.33

= ( )

= ( )

= × (1.33=4/3)

f=
32 Angle of incidence for all rays is 45 3

For Red

= , so, >

i < C. Red will emerge out of prism.


For Green

= , so, >

i > C. Green will suffer total internal reflection


For Blue

= , so, >

i > C. Blue will suffer total internal reflection.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 125


33 3

= = , = =

m= =

(ii) m= = =10

34 Since final image is formed at principal focus of L3 so parallel rays will incident on L3. So 3
distance between L2 and L3 can take any value.

Now lens L1 will form image at first principal focus of second lens.

For 1st lens




So distance between 1st and 2nd lens is 60 cm
35 Convex lens will form image at a distance 30 cm from the lens. 3

Final image will be formed at a distance 30 cm from the mirror.

36 3

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 1. b) Its critical angle with reference to air is too small 4

2. a) 2.42

3. c) high refractive index

4. d) increase

38 (i).When the image is formed at infinity, we can see it with minimum strain in the 4
ciliary muscles of the eye.
(ii) The multi-component lenses are used for both objective and the eyepiece

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 126


to improve image quality by minimising various optical aberrations in lenses.
(iii) (a)The compound microscope is used to observe minute nearby objects whereas
the telescope is used to observe distant objects.
(b) In compound microscope the focal length of the objective is lesser
than that of the eyepiece whereas in telescope the focal length of the
objective is larger than that of the eyepiece.
OR
(iii) (a) The image formed by reflecting type telescope is brighter than that formed by
refracting telescope.
(b) The image formed by the reflecting type telescope is more magnified than that
formed by the refracting type telescope.
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39 5

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 127


As

= ( )

Refractive index decreases with increase in wavelength. So focal


length will increase with increase in wavelength.
It will become diverging. Focal length may increase, decrease or
remain same.

40 5

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 128


KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 129
KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

KVS RO KOLKATA

SESSION 2023-24

STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS

CLASS-XII/XI PHYSICS

CHAPTER: 10 WAVE OPTICS

CORE QUESTION M
CONCEPT/ A
Q FOCUSED- R
NO. FORMULA/ K
TARGATED
THEOREM

SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)

Wavefront generated from a line source is


A. Cylindrical wavefront
1 Remembering B. Spherical wavefront 1
C. Plane front
D. Either a.) or b.)

In Young‘s double slit experiment, the central point on the screen is:
A. Bright
2 Remembering B. Dark 1
C. First bright and later becomes dark
D. First dark and later becomes bright

Which of the following is conserved when light waves interfere?


A. Energy
3 Remembering B. Phase 1
C. Intensity
D. Amplitude

To observe diffraction, the size of the obstacle

A. should be 𝜆⁄ , where 𝜆 is the wavelength.


4 Remembering B. should be of the order of wavelength. 1
C. has no relation to wavelength.
D. should be much larger than the wavelength.

What happens to the interference pattern, the two slits S1 and S2 in Young‘s
double slit experiment are illuminated by two independent but identical
sources?
5 Understanding 1
A. The intensity of the bright fringes doubled
B. The intensity of the bright fringes becomes four times
C. Two sets of interference fringes overlap

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 130


D. No interference pattern is observed.

Angular width of central maxima of a single slit diffraction pattern is


independent of
A. Slit width
6 Analysing 1
B. Frequency of the light used
C. Wavelength of the light used
D. Distance between slit and screen

A wavefront of a wave has direction with wave motion

A. Parallel
7 Remembering 1
B. Perpendicular
C. Opposite
D. At any arbitrary angle θ
What happen when we use white light in Young‘s double slit experiment.

A. No interference pattern will form


8 Understanding 1
B. white fringes will form
C. Central bright fringe will be white
D. Central fringe will be colored
The property of light as a wave which remains same after refraction as before

A. speed
9 Remembering 1
B. frequency
C. wavelength
D. none of these
A plane wave passed through a convex lens than geometrical shape of
emerging wavefront will be

10 Understanding A. Plane 1
B. diverging spherical
C. converging spherical
D. none of these
Two identical coherent waves each of intensity 2I0 are producing interference
pattern. What are the values of resultant intensity at a point of (1) Constructive
interference (2) destructive interference?

11 Evaluation A. 𝐼 ∶ 1

B. 𝐼 :
C. ∶ 𝐼
D. ∶
The ratio of intensities at minima to the maxima in young‘s double slit
experiment is : . Find the ratio of the widths of two slits.
12 Application 1
A.
B.
C.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 131


D. ∶
In young‘s double slit experiment using monochromatic light of wavelengths 𝜆, the intensity
of light at a point on the screen with
path difference 𝜆 is M unit. The intensity of light at a point where path difference is 𝜆/ is

A.
13 Evaluation 1
B.

C.

D.

In Young‘s double slit experiment, the fringe width is . if the entire


arrangement is placed in a liquid of refractive index n, then the fringe width
becomes
14 Analyse A. 1

B.
C.
D. /
If the 8th bright fringe of light of wavelength λ1 coincides with the 9th bright
fringe of light of the wavelength λ2 in young‘s double experiment, then the
possible wavelengths of visible light are
15 Analyse 1
A. 400nm and 450nm
B. 425nm and 400nm
C. 400nm and 425 nm
D. 450nm and 400nm
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20) 1

Assertion: (A).
Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS GIVEN
IN ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation of A. 1

b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct explanation
of A.
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.

16 Application
Assertion (A): Colours are seen in thin layers of oil on the surface of 1
water.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 132


Reason (R): White light is composed of seven colours.
Assertion (A): The maximum intensity in interference pattern is four times
17 Understanding the intensity due to each slit. 1
Reason (R): Intensity is directly proportional to square of amplitude.
Assertion (A): When tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from some
18 Remembering distance, a bright spot is seen at the centre of the shadow of the obstacle. 1
Reason (R): Destructive interference occurs at the centre of the shadow.
Assertion (A): We cannot get diffraction pattern from a wide slit illuminated by
19 Remembering monochromatic light. 1
Reason (R): In diffraction pattern, all the bright bands are not of the same intensity.
Assertion (A): In Young’s double slit experiment, the fringes become indistinct if one of
20 Application the slits is covered with cellophane paper. 1
Reason (R): The cellophane paper decreases the wavelength of light.
SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

A plane wavefront propagating in a medium of


refractive index ‗ is incident on a plane
surface making the angle of incidence i as
shown in the figure. It enters into a medium of
Application with refraction of refractive index ‗ ‘ ( ). Use
21 1
analysis Huygens‘ construction of secondary wavelets to
trace the propagation of the refracted
wavefront.

In the wave picture of light, intensity of light is determined by the square of the amplitude of
22 Critical Thinking 1
the wave. What determines the intensity in the photon picture of light?

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26] 2

The intensity of the light coming from one of the slits in a YDSE is double the
23 Evaluating intensity from the other slit. Find the ratio of maximum intensity to minimum
intensity in the interference fringe pattern observed

A slit of width a is illuminated by light of wavelength 6000 Å. For what value of a


will the
24 Evaluating 2
(i) First maximum fall at an angle of diffraction of 30°
(ii) First minimum fall at an angle of diffraction 30°?
Find the intensity at a point on the screen in Young‘s double slit experiment where
25 Evaluating 2
the interfering waves of equal intensity 𝐼 each have a path difference of 𝜆⁄

Explain why
26 Remembering (a) No interference pattern is detected when two coherent sources are 2
indefinitely close to each other.
(b) Coherent sources are required to create interference pattern.
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF THE

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 133


CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]

In a double slit experiment, the distance between the slits is 3 mm and the slits are 2
m away from the screen. Two interference patterns can be seen on the screen one due
27 Evaluation to light with wavelength 480 nm, and the other due to light with wavelength 600 nm. 2
What is the separation on the screen between the fifth order bright fringes of the two
interference patterns?

Explain how the interference pattern produced by two coherent sources of light can
28 Understanding 2
be used to determine the wavelength of light.

If one of two identical slits producing interference in Young‘s experiment is covered


29 Evaluating with glass, so that the light intensity passing through it is reduced to 50%, find the 2
ratio of the maximum and minimum intensity of the fringe in the interference pattern.

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33) 3

Draw intensity distribution for (i) the fringes produced in interference, and (ii) the
30 Remembering diffraction bands produced due to single slit. Write two points of difference between
the phenomenon of interference and diffraction.

Explain the following, giving reasons:


i) When monochromatic light is incident on a surface separating two media, the
reflected and refracted light both have the same frequency as the incident
Understanding frequency.
31 3
and Application ii) When light travels from a rarer to a denser medium, the speed decreases. Does
this decrease in speed imply a reduction in the energy carried by the wave?
iii) In the wave picture of light, intensity of light is determined by the square of
the amplitude of the wave. What determines the intensity in the photon
picture of light?
Draw the diagrams to show the behaviour of plane wavefronts as they (a) pass
32 Application through a thin prism, and (b) pass through a thin convex lens and (c) reflect by a 3
concave mirror.

In a single slit diffraction experiment first minimum for 𝜆 = 660 nm coincides with
33 Evaluation 3
first maxima for wavelength 𝜆 . Calculate 𝜆 .

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF THE


CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)

Two wavelengths of sodium light and are used, in turn to study the
diffraction taking place at a single slit of aperture .
34 Evaluation The distance between the slit and the screen is . Calculate the separation 3
between the positions of the first maxima of the diffraction
pattern obtained in the two cases.

Explain the following, giving reasons:


(i) When light travels from a rarer to a denser medium, the speed decreases. Does this
35 Conceptual decrease in speed imply a reduction in the energy carried by the wave? 3
(ii) In the wave picture of light, intensity of light is determined by the square of the
amplitude of the wave. What determines the intensity in the
photon picture of light?

(a) What is the effect on the interference fringes in a Young‘s double slit experiment
36 Remembering when 3
(i) the separation between the two slits is decreased?
(ii) the width of the source slit is increased?

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 134


Justify your answer in each case.
(b) The intensity at the central maxima in Young‘s double slit experimental set-up is
I0. Show that the intensity at a point where the path difference is l/3 is I0/4.
SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

Huygen principle is the basis of wave theory


of light. Each point on a wavefront acts as a
fresh source of new disturbance, called
secondary waves or wavelets. The secondary
wavelets spread out in all directions with the
speed light in the given medium.
An initially parallel cylindrical beam travels in
a medium of refractive index 𝐼
𝐼, where m0 and m2 are positive constants
and I is the intensity of the light beam. The
intensity of the beam is decreasing with
increasing radius.

A. The initial shape of the wavefront of the


beam is
(a) Planar
(b) Convex
Conceptual and (c) Concave
37 4
Application (d) Convex near axis and concave near periphery

B. According to Huygens Principle, the surface of constant phase is


(a) Called an optical ray
(b) Called a wave
(c) Called a wavefront
(d) Always linear in shape

C. As the beam enters the medium, it will


(a) Travel as cylindrical beam
(b) Diverge
(c) Converge
(d) Diverge near axis and converge near the periphery

D. Huygen‘s principle doesn‘t explain


(a) Photoelectric effect
(b) Refraction
(c) Reflection
(d) All of these
The phenomenon of bending of light
around the sharp corners and the
spreading of light within the
geometrical shadow of the opaque
obstacles is called diffraction of light. The
Conceptual and light thus deviates from its linear path. The
38 deviation becomes much more 4
Application
pronounced, when the dimensions of the
aperture or the obstacle are comparable to
the wavelength of light.

A. In diffraction from a single slit the angular width of the central maxima does
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 135
not depends on
(a) 𝜆 of light used
(b) Width of slit
(c) Distance of slits from the screen
(d) Ratio of 𝜆 and slit width

B. For a diffraction from a single slit, the intensity of the central point is
(a) Infinite
(b) Finite and same magnitude as the surrounding maxima
(c) Finite but much larger than the surrounding maxima
(d) Finite and substantially smaller than the surrounding maxima

C. In a single diffraction pattern observed on a screen placed at D metre distance


from the slit of width d metre, the ratio of the width of the central maxima to
the width of other secondary maxima is
(a) ∶
(b) ∶
(c) ∶
(d) ∶

D. Diffraction of sound waves more evident in daily experience than that of light
wave as
(a) Daily obstacles are smaller in size than wavelength of sound
(b) Daily obstacles are of same size as of wavelength of sound
(c) Daily obstacles are of same size than wavelength of light
(d) Daily obstacles are smaller in size than wavelength of light
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

Remembering (a) Use Huygen’s geometrical construction to show how a plane wave-front at t = 0
propagates and produces a wave-front at a later time.
Application (b) Verify, using Huygen’s principle, the law of reflection.
39 5
Understanding (c) When monochromatic light is incident on a surface separating two media, the
reflected and refracted light both have the same frequency.
Explain why.

Remembering (a) In Young‘s double slit experiment, deduce the conditions for (i) constructive, and
(ii) destructive interference at a point on the screen. Draw a graph showing
Application variation of the resultant intensity in the interference pattern against position ‗X‘
40 on the screen. 5
Understanding
(b) Compare and contrast the pattern which is seen with two coherently illuminated
narrow slits in Young‘s experiment with that seen for a coherently illuminated
single slit producing diffraction.

ANSWER KEY:

Q.NO. Answer MARK


SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]

1 A 1

2 A 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 136


3 A 1

4 B 1

5 D 1

6 D 1

7 B 1

8 C 1

9 B 1

10 C 1

11 B 1

12 A 1

13 B 1

14 D 1

15 D 1

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)

16 B 1

17 B 1

18 C 1

19 B 1

20 C 1

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21

22 For a given frequency, intensity of light in the photon picture is determined by

𝐼 1

Where is no of photons incident normally to cross-section area in time

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 137


23 1

24

25 If
1
And we know

And 𝐼 𝐼 𝐼
1

26 (a) Fringe width is given by ⇒ ∝


When is very small, fringe width will be too large. In such case, single fringe will 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 138


occupy whole screen and fringe pattern cannot be detected.

(b) In case of incoherent sources, the intensity at a point on screen will go on changing with
time so rapidly that pattern on the screen will not be sustained and detectable.
1

27 𝜆 ½

Take 𝜆 𝜆

½
th
For Case I: 5 bright fringe =
½
th
For Case II: 5 bright fringe =

Distance between 5th fringes of two patterns = ½

28 To find out unknown wavelength 𝜆 of light, we use that light as a source in Young Double Slit
1
experiment and measure the width of the fringes on screen in the experiment.

By measuring the values of slits separation and slits to screen separation and substituting
the measured values in formula

and from here we can determine unknown wavelength 𝜆 𝜆 1

29 1

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

30

1+2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 139


Differences between interference and diffraction (Any two)

Interference Diffraction
It is due to the superposition of two waves It is due to the superposition of secondary
coming from two coherent sources. wavelets originating from different parts of the
same wavefront.

The width of the interference bands is equal. The width of the diffraction bands is not the
same.

The intensity of all maxima (fringes) is same. The intensity of central maximum is maximum
and goes on decreasing rapidly with increase in
order of maxima.

31 (i) Reflection and refraction arise through interaction of incident light with atomic constituents
of matter which vibrate with the same frequency as that of the incident light. Hence frequency remains
unchanged.
(ii) No; when light travels from a rarer to a denser media, its frequency remains unchanged. According to 1+1+1
quantum theory of light, the energy of light photon depends on frequency and not on speed.
(iii) For a given frequency, intensity of light in the photon picture is determined by the number of photon
incident normally on a crossing an unit area per unit time.
32 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 140


33 1

34 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 141


1

35 ½

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 142


36 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 143


SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 A. a

B. c
4
C. c

D. a

38 A. c

B. c
4
C. a

D. b

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39 (a) Consider a plane wavefront moving towards right. Let AB be its 1


position at any instant of time. The region on its left has received the
wave while region on the right is undisturbed.
According to Huygens principle, each point on AB becomes a source
of secondary disturbance, which takes with the same speed . To find
the new wavefront after time t, we draw spheres of radii , from
each point on AB.
The forward envelope or the tangential surface of the
secondary wavelets give the new wavefront after time .

(b) Let XY be a reflecting surface at which a wavefront is being incident obliquely. Let v be the
speed of the wavefront and at time t = 0, the wavefront touches the surface XY at A. After
time t, the point B of wavefront reaches the point B′ of the surface. According to Huygen‘s
principle each point of wavefront acts as a
source of secondary waves. When the
point A of wavefront strikes the reflecting
surface, then due to presence of reflecting
surface, it cannot advance further; but the
secondary wavelet originating from point
A begins to spread in all directions in the
first medium with speed v. As the
wavefront AB advances further, its points A1, A2, A3 ... etc. strike the reflecting surface 1
successively and send spherical secondary wavelets in the first medium. First of all the
secondary wavelet starts from point A and traverses distance AA' (= ) in first medium in
time t. In the same time t, the point B of wavefront, after travelling a distance BB', reaches
point B' (of the surface), from where the secondary wavelet now starts. Now taking A as
centre we draw a spherical arc of radius AA' (= ) and draw tangent A'B' on this arc from
point B'. As the incident wavefront AB advances, the secondary wavelets starting from
points between A and B', one after the other and will touch A'B' simultaneously. According
to Huygen‘s principle wavefront A'B' represents the new position of AB, i.e., A'B' is the
reflected wavefront corresponding to incident wavefront AB.
Now in right-angled triangles ABB' and AA'B'
∠ABB' = ∠AA'B' (both are equal to 90°)

side BB' = side AA' (both are equal to )

and side AB' is common.


1
i.e., both triangles are congruent.

∠ BAB' = ∠ AB'A'

Angle of incidence i = Angle of reflection r

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 144


This is the second law of reflection.

(c) Reflection and refraction arise through interaction of incident light with atomic constituents
of matter which vibrate with the same frequency as that of the incident light. Hence
frequency remains unchanged.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 145


40

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 146


KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 147
KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN
KVS RO KOLKATA

SESSION 2023-24
STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS
CLASS-XII/XI PHYSICS

CHAPTER: 11 DUAL NATURE OF MATTER AND


RADIATION

Q CORE QUESTION M
NO. CONCEPT/ A
FOCUSED- R
FORMULA/ K
TARGATED
THEOREM
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)
1 Photoelectric The emission of electrons does not occur in which of the following? 1
Emission a. Photoelectric Emission
b. Thermionic Emission
c. Secondary Emission
d. X-Ray Emission
2 Photoelectric What happens to the kinetic energy of the emitted electrons when the light is incident 1
effect on a metal surface?
a. It varies with the frequency of light
b. It varies with the light intensity
c. It varies with the speed of light
d. It varies irregularly
3 Wave theory of Which of the following does the wave theory of light not explain? 1
light
a. Diffraction
b. Photocurrent
c. Polarization
d. Interference

4 Photoelectric The photoelectric effect is based on the law of conservation of 1


effect
a. Energy
b. Momentum
c. Mass
d. Angular momentum

5 Photoelectric A photoelectric cell is a device which 1


effect
a. Converts light energy into electricity
b. Converts electricity into light energy
c. Stores Light energy
d. Stores Electricity
6 Characteristics Photon does not possess 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 148


of photon a. Energy
b. Momentum
c. Rest Mass
d. Frequency

7 Photoelectric For a metal having a work function W0, the threshold wavelength is λ. What is the 1
effect threshold wavelength for the metal having work function 2W0?
a. λ/4
b. λ/2
c. 2λ
d. 4λ
8 De Broglie Calculate the de Broglie wavelength associated with the electron which has a kinetic 1
theory energy of 5 eV.
a. 5.47 Å
b. 2.7 Å
c. 5.9 Å
d. None of the above
9 Photoelectric Light of frequency 1.9 times the threshold frequency is incident on a photosensitive 1
effect material. If the frequency is halved and intensity is doubled, the photocurrent
becomes
a. doubled
b. quadrupled
c. halved
d. zero
10 Relation By what factor will the de Broglie wavelength change if the K.E if the free electron is 1
between de doubled?
Broglie
wavelength a. 1/2
and kinetic b. 1/
energy. c. 2
d.
11 Photoelectric In photoelectric effect what determines the maximum velocity of the electron reacting 1
effect with the collector?
a. Frequency of incident radiation alone
b. The potential difference between the emitter and the collector
c. The work function of metal
d. All of these
12 Quantisation of Who among the following established that electric charge is quantised? 1
charge
a. R.A. Millikan
b. Wilhelm Rontgen
c. William Crookes
d. J.J. Thomson
13 Photoelectric Which of the following statements is true regarding the photoelectric experiment? 1
effect
a. The stopping potential increases with the increase in the intensity of incident
light.
b. The photocurrent increases with the intensity of light.
c. The photocurrent increases with the increase in frequency
d. All of the above
14 Relation What is the ratio of the de Broglie wavelengths proton and an α particle if they are
between de accelerated by the same potential difference?
Broglie
wavelength a. 2√2: 1
and applied b. 3:2
potetial c. 3√2: 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 149


difference d. 2: 1
15 Photoelectric Radiation of frequency ν is incident on a photosensitive metal. When the frequency 1
effect of the incident radiation is doubled, what is the maximum kinetic energy of the
photoelectrons?
a. 4E
b. 2E
c. E + hν
d. E – hν
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20) 1
Assertion: (A). 1
Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS GIVEN IN
ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A.
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.
16 Photoelectric Assertion : Though light of a single frequency (monochromatic) is incident on a 1
effect metal, the energies of
emitted photoelectrons are different.
Reason : The energy of electrons emitted from inside the metal surface, is lost in
collision with the other atoms in the metal.
17 Photoelectric Assertion : The photoelectrons produced by a monochromatic light beam incident on 1
effect a metal surface have a spread in their kinetic energies.
Reason : The work function of the metal is its characteristics property.
18 Photoelectric Assertion : Photoelectric saturation current increases with the increase in frequency 1
effect of incident light.
Reason : Energy of incident photons increases with increase in frequency and as a
result photoelectric current increases.
19 Photoelectric Assertion : In an experiment on photoelectric effect, a photon is incident on an 1
effect electron from one direction and the photoelectron is emitted almost in the opposite
direction. It violate the principle of conservation of linear momentum.
Reason : It does not violate the principle of conservation of linear momentum.

20 Photoelectric Assertion : The kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted from metal surface does not 1
effect depend on the intensity of incident photon.
Reason : The ejection of electrons from metallic surface is not possible with
frequency of incident photons below the threshold frequency.

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN


NO 21-22)
21 Photoelectric The maximum kinetic energy of a photoelectron is 3 eV. What is its stopping 1
effect potential?

22 Photoelectric Why is photoelectric emission not possible at all frequencies? 1


effect

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 150


FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26] 2
23 De Broglie A proton and an electron have same kinetic energy. Which one has greater de-Broglie
wave theory of wavelength and why?
light
24 Photoelectric Show on a plot the nature of variation of photoelectric current with the intensity of 2
effect radiation incident on a photosensitive surface.

25 Photoelectric (i) Define the term ‗threshold frequency‘ as used in photoelectric effect. 2
effect (ii) Plot a graph showing the variation of photoelectric current as a function of anode
potential for two light beams having the same frequency but different intensities
I1 and I2 (I1 > I2).
26 De Broglie Plot a graph showing variation of de-Broglie wavelength λ versus 1V√, where V is 2
wave theory of accelerating potential for two particles A and B carrying same charge but of masses
light m1, m2 (m1 > m2). Which one of the two represents a particle of smaller mass and
why?

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF


THE CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]
27 De Broglie Calculate the de-Broglie wavelength of the electron orbiting in the n = 2 state of 2
wave theory of hydrogen atom.
light
28 De Broglie The Kinetic Energy (K.E.), of a beam of electrons, accelerated through a potential V, 2
wave theory of equals the energy of a photon of wavelength 5460 nm. Find the de Broglie
light wavelength associated with this beam of electrons.

29 De Broglie Derive the Bohr‘s quantisation condition for angular momentum of the orbiting of 2
wave theory of electron in hydrogen atom, using de Broglie‘s hypothesis.
light

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)


FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33) 3
30 Photoelectric Write Einstein‘s photoelectric equation. State clearly the three salient features
effect observed in photoelectric effect, which can be explained on the basis of the above
equation.
31 Photoelectric Plot a graph showing the variation of stopping potential with the frequency of 3
effect incident radiation for two different photosensitive materials having work functions
W1 and W2 (W1 > W2). On what factors does the
(i) slope and
(ii) intercept of the lines depend?
32 Photoelectric X-rays fall on a photosensitive surface to cause photoelectric emission. Assuming 3
effect that the work function of the surface can be neglected, find the relation between the
de-Broglie wavelength (λ) of the electrons emitted to the energy (E0) of the incident
photons. Draw the nature of the graph for X as a function of Ev.
33 Photoelectric State two properties of photons. For a monochromatic radiation incident on a 3
effect photosensitive surface, why do all photoelectrons not come out with the same energy?
Give reason for your answer.
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF
THE CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)
34 Photoelectric The following graph shows the variation of stopping potential V0 with the frequency 3
effect v of the incident radiation for two photosensitive metals X and Y :

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 151


(i) Which of the metals has larger threshold wavelength? Give reason.
(ii) Explain, giving reason, which metal gives out electrons, having larger kinetic
energy, for the same wavelength of the incident radiation.
(iii) If the distance between the light source and metal X is halved, how will the
kinetic energy of electrons emitted from it change? Give reason.

35 Photon picture An electron and a photon each have a wavelength of 1.50 nm. Find 3
of light (i) their momenta,
(ii) the energy of the photon and
(iii) kinetic energy of the electron.
36 Photoelectric Define the terms 3
effect (i) ‗cut-off voltage‘ and
(ii) ‗threshold frequency‘ in relation to the pheno-menon of photoelectric effect.
Using Einstein‘s photoelectric equation show how the cut-off voltage and threshold
frequency for a
given photosensitive material can be determined with the help of a suitable
plot/graph.

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)


37 Photoelectric According to wave theory of light, the light of any frequency can emit electrons from 4
effect metallic surface provided the intensity of light be sufficient to provide necessary
energy for emission of electrons, but according to experimental observations, the light
of frequency less than threshold frequency cannot emit electrons; whatever be the
intensity of incident light. Einstein also proposed that electromagnetic radiation is
quantized.

If photoelectrons are ejected from a surface when light of wavelength λ 1 = 550 nm is


incident on it. The stopping potential for such electrons is V s =0.19 . Suppose the
radiation of wavelength λ2 = 190 nm is incident on the surface.

(i) Photoelectric effect supports quantum nature of light because


(A) there is a minimum frequency of light below which no photoelectrons are
emitted.
(B) the maximum K.E. of photoelectric depends only on the frequency of light and
not on its intensity.
(C) even when the metal surface is faintly illuminated, the photo electrons leave the
surface immediately.
(D) electric charge of the photoelectrons is quantized.
(a) A, B, D
(b) B, C
(c) C, D
(d) A, D, C

(ii) In photoelectric effect, electrons are ejected from metals, if the incident light has a
certain minimum
(a) wavelength

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 152


(b) frequency
(c) amplitude
(d) angle of incidence

(iii) Calculate the stopping potential Vs2 of surface.


(a) 4.47
(b) 3.16
(c) 2.76
(d) 5.28

(iv) Calculate the work function of the surface.


(a) 3.75
(b) 2.07
(c) 4.20
(d) 3.60

38 Photoelectric Photoelectric effect is the phenomenon of emission of electrons from a metal surface, 4
effect when radiations of suitable frequency fallon them. The emitted electrons are called
photoelectrons and the current so produced is called photoelectric current.
(i) With the increase of intensity of incident radiations on photoelectrons emitted by a
photo tube, the number of photoelectrons emitted per unit time is
(a) increases (b) decreases
(c) remains same (d) none of these
(ii) A point source of light of power 3.2 x 10-3 W emits monoenergetic photons of
energy 5.0 eV and work function 3.0 eV. The efficiency of photoelectron emission is
1 for every 106 incident photons. Assume that photoelectrons are instantaneously
swept away after emission. The maximum kinetic energy of photon is
(a) 4 eV (b) 5 eV
(c) 2 eV (d) Zero
(iii) Which of the following device is the application of Photoelectric effect?
(a) Light emitting diode (b) Diode
(c) Photocell (d) Transistor
(iv) If the frequency of incident light falling on a photosensitive metal is doubled, the
kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectron is
(a) unchanged (b) halved
(c) doubled (d) more than twice its initial value
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)
39 Photoelectric a) Write three observed features of photoelectric effect which cannot be explained by 5
effect wave theory of light.
Explain how Einstein‘s photoelectric equation is used to describe these features
satisfactorily.
(b) Figure shows a plot of stopping potential (v0) with frequency (v) of incident
radiation for two photosensitive materials M1 and M2.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 153


Explain
(i) why the slope of both the lines is same?
(ii) for which material emitted electrons have greater kinetic energy for the same
frequency of incident radiation?

40 Photoelectric (i) State three important features of Einstein‘s photoelectric equation. 5


effect (ii) Radiation of frequency 1015 Hz is incident on two photosensitive surfaces P and
Q. There is no photoemission from surface P. Photoemission occurs from surface Q
but photoelectrons have zero kinetic energy. Explain these observations and find the
value of work function for surface Q.

ANSWER KEY:

Q.NO. Answer MARK

SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]


1 D 1
2 A 1
3 B 1
4 A 1
5 A 1
6 C 1
7 B 1
8 A 1
9 D 1
10 B 1
11 D 1
12 A 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 C 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 154


SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)
16 A 1
17 B 1
18 D 1
19 D 1
20 B 1

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-


22)
21 1

22 Photoelectric emission is possible only if the energy of the incident photon (hv) is greater than 1
the work function (ω0 = hv0) of the metal. Hence the frequency v of the incident radiation must
be greater than the threshold frequency v0.

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)


23 2

24 2

25 (i) Threshold frequency. The minimum frequency v0 which the incident light must possess so 2
as to eject photoelectrons from a metal surface, is called threshold frequency of the metal.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 155


26 2

27 2

28 2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 156


29 2

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)


30 Einstein‘s photoelectric equation is Kmax = hv – ϕ0 3
(i) We find Kmax depends linearly on V only. It is independent of intensity of radiation.

(iii) Greater the number of energy quanta, greater is the number of photoelectrons. So,
photoelectric current is proportional to intensity.
31 3

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 157


32 3

33 ● Two properties of photons : 3

● photon is electrically neutral.

● photon has an energy equal to hv

● For a monochromatic radiation incident on a photosensitive surface, all


photoelectrons do not come out with the same energy, because in addition to the
work done to free electrons from the surface, different (emitted) photoelectrons
need different amount of work to be done on them to reach the surface.

34 3

For the same λ of incident radiation, L.H.S. is constant. So metal X with higher value of λ0 will
emit photoelectrons of larger K.E.
(iii) Kinetic energy will not change. On reducing the distance only intensity of light changes,
frequency remains same. K.E. of emitted photoelectrons depends on frequency

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 158


35 3

36 i) Cut-off voltage : The value of the retarding potential at which the photo electric current 3
becomes zero is called cut-off or stopping potential for the given frequency of the incident
radiation.
(ii) Threshold frequency : The minimum value of the frequency of incident radiation below
which the photoelectric emission stops altogether is called threshold frequency.
According to Eisntein‘s photo electric equation,

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)


37 A,b,d,c 4

38 B,d,a,c 4

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)


39 a) 5
(i) The maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electron should be directly proportional
to the intensity of incident radiations but it is not observed experimentally. Also

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 159


maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons should not depend upon incident
frequency according to wave theory, but it is not so.
(ii) According to wave theory, threshold frequency should not exist. Light of all
frequencies should emit electrons provided intensity of light is sufficient for electrons
to eject.
(iii) According to wave theory, photoelectric effect should not be instantaneous. Energy
of wave cannot be transferred to a particular electron but will be distributed to all the
electrons present in the illuminated portion. Hence, there has to be a time lag between
incidence of radiation and emission of electrons.

(b)
(i) The slope (V0/v) of both the lines is the same and represents the universal constant
known as ‗Planck‘s constant‘ (h) = 6.62 × 10-34JS
(ii) For the same frequency of incident radiations, M1 will have greater kinetic energy,
because the value of V0 is greater for M1 material. It can be easily seen by drawing a
vertical line (frequency being the same) and intersecting M1 and M2 at different points
(V0 for M1 is higher)

40 (i) 5
Important features of photoelectric effect:
(a) Radiation behaves as if it is made of particles like photons. Each photon has energy
E = hv and momentum p = h/λ.
(b) Intensity of radiation can be understood in terms of number of photons falling per
second on the surface. Photon energy
depends only on frequency and is independent of intensity.
(c) Photoelectric effect can be understood as the result of the one to one collision
between an electron and a photon.
(d) When a photon of frequency
(v) is incident on a metal surface, a part of its energy is used in overcoming the work
function and other part is used in imparting kinetic energy, so KE = h(v – v0)

(ii) Since no photoelectric emission takes place from P, it means frequency of incident
radiation (1015 Hz) is less than its threshold frequency (v0)p.
Photo emission takes place from Q but kinetic energy of photoelectrons is zero. This
implies that frequency of incident radiation is just equal to the threshold frequency of
Q.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 160


KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

KVS RO KOLKATA

SESSION 2023-24

STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS

CLASS-XII/XI PHYSICS

CHAPTER 12: ATOM

Q CORE CONCEPT/ QUESTION M


NO FOCUSED-FORMULA/ A
. TARGATED THEOREM R
K

SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)

1. Relation with 1.The magnetic field induction produced at the centre of orbit due to 1
magnetic moment an electron revolving in nthorbit of hydrogen atom is proportional to
and quantum nomber
(1)n-3 (2)n-5 (3) n5 (4)n

2. of electron in
Speed 2. The speed of an electron in the orbit of hydrogen atom in the ground 1
ground state state is
(1) c (2) c/10 (3) c/2 (4) c/137

3. Relation of time 3. How many times does the electron go round the first Bohr orbit in a 1
period for the second?
revolution of electron
(1) 6.57 x 105 (2) 6.57x1010 (3) 6.57 x1013 (4) 6.57 x1015

4. f2- 1/ni2)
f=cR(1/n 4. Which of the following transitions in a hydrogen atom emit photons 1
of lowest frequency?
(1) n = 2 to n = 1 (2) n = 4 to n = 2 (3) n = 4 to n = 3 (4) n = 3 to n = 1

Number
5. of revolution 5.How many times does the electron go round the first Bohr orbit in a 1
second?
f =1/T
(1) 6.57 × 105 (2) 6.57 × 1010 (3) 6.57 × 1013 (4) 6.57 × 1015

6. =E0/n2
Energy 6.. The ratio of the energies of the hydrogen atom in its first excited 1
state to second excited state is

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 161


(1)1/4 (2) 4/9 (3) 9/4 (4) 4

K.E=-(T.E)
7. 7. The total energy of an electron in the hydrogen atom in the ground 1
state is –13.6 eV. The kinetic energy ofthis electron is
(1) 13.6 eV (2) 0 (3) –13.6 eV (4) 6.8 eV

8. transition
Possible 8. Which series of hydrogen atom lie in infra red region? 1
and corresponding
(1) Lyman (2) Balmer
series
(3) Brackett, Paschen and Pfund (4) All of these

no of9.possible 9. When an electron is excited to nth energy state in hydrogen, the 1


spectral lines possible number of spectral lines emitted are
corresponding to a
(1) n (2) 2n (3) (n2-n)/2 (4) (n2+n)/2
transition

10. between
relationship 10. When an electron in hydrogen atom is taken from fourth excited 1
K.E & P.E with state to ground state
principal quantum
(1) Both kinetic energy and potential energy increases
nomber
(2) Both kinetic energy and potential energy decreases
(3) Kinetic energy will increase while potential energy will decrease
(4) Kinetic energy will decrease while potential energy will increase.

11.of K.E with


Relation 11. The speed of an electron in the 4th orbit of hydrogen atom is 1
principal quantum
(1) c (2) c/137 (3) c/2192 (4) c/548
nomber

12. between
Relation 12. Using Bohr’s formula for energy quantization, the ionisation 1
ionisation energy and potential of first excited state of hydrogen atom is
excitation energy
(1) 13.6 V (2) 3.4 V (3) 2.6 V (4) 1.51 V

13. of Bohr’s
Validation 13. Bohr’s atomic model is applicable for 1
model for hydrogen
(1) Hydrogen atom only (2) Unielectron atomic system only
or hydrogen like ion
(3) All atoms (4) All isotopes of hydrogen only

1 Transition energy, 14. An electron in a hydrogen atom makes a transition such that its 1
14. (P.E)=2(T.E) kinetic energy increases, then
(1) The electron may have excited form n = 2 to n = 3
(2) Potential energy of the electron increases
(3) Potential energy of the electron decreases
(4) Total energy of the electron increases

Bohr’s quantisation 15. 23. Which of the following cannot be the value of ionisation energy

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 162


15. condition for a hydrogen atom?
(1) 0.85 eV (2) 3.4 eV (3) 1.51 eV (4) 0.27 eV

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20) 1

Assertion: (A). 1
Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS GIVEN IN
ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct
explanation of A.
b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct
explanation of A.
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.

16. Spectral series 16. A : The Bohr model of the hydrogen atom does not explain the fine 1
structure of spectral lines.and
R : The Bohr model does not take into account the spin of the
electron.

17. Differences among 17. A : Both the Thomson's as well as the Rutherford's models 1
Thomson’s model constitute an unstable system.
and Rutherford’s
R : Thomson's model is unstable electrostatically while Rutherford's
model
model is unstable because of electromagnetic radiation of orbiting
electrons.

18. Hiesenburg 18. A : Bohr's orbits are regions where the electron may be found with 1
uncertainty principle large probability.
and Forbidden energy
R : The orbital picture in Bohr's model of the hydrogen atom was
gap
inconsistent with the uncertainty principle.

19. Possible Spectral 19. A : In Bohr model, the frequency of revolution of an electron in its 1
emission orbit is not connected to the frequency of spectral line for smaller
principal quantum number n.
R : For transitions between large quantum number the frequency of
revolution of an electron in its orbit is connected to the frequency of
spectral line, as per Bohr's Correspondence principle.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 163


20. Relation of magnetic 20. A : According to Bohr’s atomic model the ratio of angular momenta 1
moment and angular of an electron in first excited state andin ground state is
momentum with
2 : 1.
principal quantum
nomber R : In a Bohr’s atom the angular momentum of the electron is directly
proportional to the principal quantum number.

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO


21-22)

21. Radius =0.53n2/z A0 21. Which state of triply ionised beryllium (Be3+) has the same orbital 1
radius as that of the ground state of Hydrogen and why?

22. 22-Largest 22. The largest wavelength in the ultraviolet region of the hydrogen 1
wavelength in spectrum is 122 nm. What will be The smallest wavelength in
ultraviolet region is
the infrared region of the hydrogen spectrum (to the nearest integer)
for Lyman Series given
by 4/3R=122nm
Smallest wavelength
in infra red region is
for Paschen series is
given by 9/R=823 nm

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26]

23. Impact parameter 23. What is Impact parameter? 2

24. Impact parameter 24. What is the significance of impact parameter? 2

25. Bohr’s quantisation 25. State Bohr postulate of hydrogen atom that gives the relationship 2
condition for the frequency of emitted photon in a transition.

26. Relation of radius for 26. The radius of innermost electron orbit of a hydrogen atom is 5.3 X 2
nth orbit 10-11 m. What is the radius of orbit in the second excited state ?

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING


OUTCOME OF THE CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]

27. Principal quantum 27. element with principal quantum number n > 4 were not allowed in 2
nomber nature, then what will be the number of possible elements

28. Wavelength range of 28. Of the various series of the hydrogen spectrum then state which 2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 164


spectral lines one lies completely in the ultraviolet region and why?

29. .Energy =E0/n2 29. As the n (number of orbit) increases, then what will happen with 2
the difference of energy between the consecutive energy levels ?

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33) 3

30. Bohr’s quantisation State Bohr’s postulate of hydrogen atom which successfully explains
condition emission lines in the spectrum of hydrogen atom.

31. Energy =E0/n2 What is the ratio of radii of the orbits corresponding to first excited 3
state and ground state in a hydrogen atom ?

32. f=cR(1/nf2- 1/ni2) Find out the wavelength of the electron orbiting in the ground state of 3
hydrogen atom.

33. V=V0/n Use Bohr model of hydrogen atom to calculate the speed of the 3
electron in the first excited state.

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING


OUTCOME OF THE CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)

34. Negative energy The value of ground state energy of hydrogen atom is- 13.6 eV,what 3
means binded force. does the negative sign signify ?

35. Energy =E0/n2 How much energy is required to take an electron in this atom from the 3
ground state to the first excited state ?

36. r is inversely In hydrogen atom,if the electron is replaced by a particle which is 200 3
proportional to m times heavier but have the same charge, how would its radius change ?

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

According to the third postulate of Bohr’s model, when an atom makes


a transition from the higher energy state with quantum number ni to
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 165
the lower energy state with quantum number nf (nf < ni), the
difference of energy is carried away by a photon of frequency ν such
that hν = Eni – Enf. Since both nf and ni are integers, this immediately
shows that in transitions between different atomic levels, light is
radiated in various discrete frequencies. For hydrogen spectrum, the
Balmer formula corresponds to nf = 2 and ni = 3, 4, 5 etc. The results of
the Bohr’s model suggested the presence of other series spectra for
hydrogen atom–those corresponding to transitions resulting from nf = 1
and ni = 2, 3, etc; nf = 3 and ni = 4, 5, etc. and so on. Such series were
identified in the course of spectroscopic investigations and are known
as the Lyman, Balmer, Paschen, Brackett, and Pfund series. The
electronic transitions corresponding to these series are shown in Fig.
The various lines in the atomic spectra are produced when electrons
jump from higher energy state to a lower energy state and photons are
emitted. These spectral lines are called emission lines. But when an
atom absorbs a photon that has precisely the same energy needed by
the electron in a lower energy state to make transitions to a higher
energy state, the process is called absorption. Thus, if photons with a
continuous range of frequencies pass through a rarefied gas and then
are analysed with a spectrometer, a series of dark spectral absorption
lines appear in the continuous spectrum. The dark lines indicate the
frequencies that have been absorbed by the atoms of the gas. The
explanation of the hydrogen atom spectrum provided by Bohr’s model
was a brilliant achievement, which greatly stimulated progress towards
the modern quantum theory.

37. (i) The series of spectrum when electron jumps from n = 5 to n = 3 is 4


Series(Lyman,Balmer,
(a) Lymen (b) Balmer (c) Paschen (d) Bracket
Paschen,Bracket,etc.)
of spectral lines for
specific transitions
(ii) Balmer series is obtained when electron transits from
and corresponding
series limit. (a) n = 1,2,3, … to n = 5 (b) n = 3,4,5 … to n = 2
(c) n = 1,2,3, … to n = 4 (d) n = 1,2,3, … to n = 6

(iii) From Fig. shown predict which series has waves of maximum
frequency
(a) Lymen (b) Balmer (c) Paschen (d) Bracket

(iv) What is the maximum energy of photon in emission spectrum of


hydrogen atom
(a) 13.6 eV (b) 1.36 eV (c) 1.5 eV (d) 1eV

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 166


38. Series(Lyman,Balmer, (i)Pfund series is obtained when electron transits from 4
Paschen,Bracket,etc.)
(a) n = 1,2,3, … to n = 5 (b) n = 3,4,5 … to n = 2
of spectral lines for
specific transitions (c) n = 1,2,3, … to n = 4 (d) n = 6,7,8, … to n = 5
and corresponding
series limit.
(ii) Bracket series is obtained when electron transits from
(a) n = 1,2,3, … to n = 5 (b) n = 3,4,5 … to n = 2
(c) n = 5,6,7, … to n = 4 (d) n = 6,7,8, … to n = 5
(iii)which one will be the longest wavelength in Paschen series in
Angstrom
(a)18752 (b)16540 (c)12352 (d) 15632
(iv)Which one is the shortest wavelength present in the paschen series
of spectral lines?
(a)820 nm (b) 740 nm (c)610 nm (d)720 nm

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39. 39. Calculate the total energy of the electron in the first Bohr’s orbit. 5
En = RCh/n2

40. K.E=-(T.E) 40.The total energy of the electron 5


(P.E)=2(T.E) In the ground state of normal Hydrogen atom is -13.6 ev.Find the
corresponding kinetic energy and potential energy

Sl Important Video link [OPTIONAL]


no.

1 https://youtu.be/FzB4zGOLivw?si=D60AUvfAnQdfJ9GB

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 167


Sl no. Important Facts/ information you like to share
OR [OPTIONAL]
Short cut Tips

ANSWER KEY:

Q.NO. Answer M
A
R
K

SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]

1 1 Answer (2) 1

2 2 Answer (4) 1
The speed of electron in ground state of an hydrogen atom is about 2.2x 106 Which is
approximately /

3 3 Answer (4) 1
6.57 × 1015

4 4 Answer (3) 1
The pair for which the value
f=cR(1/nf2- 1/ni2)
is lowest is 4 and 3

5 5 Answer (4) 1
T0 is time period in ground state of hydrogen
Number of revolution = (f) =1/T=1/1.5x10-6

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 168


6 Answer (3) 1
Energy in its 1st excited =E0/4
6
Energy in its 2nd excited state =E0/9
E1:E2=9:4

7 Answer (1) 1
Total energy = –PE + KE
7
where PE = –2KE
∴ KE = 13.6 eV

8 8 Answer (3) 1
The Brackett, Paschen and Pfund series are series which lie in the infrared region.

9 Answer (3) 1
n
C =n(n-1)/2
9
n
C =n(n-1)/2

10 Answer (3) 1
1
Both U & K is inversely proportional to n2
0
potential energy is negative whereas kinetic energy is positive.

11 Answer (4) 1
1
V=V0/n=c/548
1

12 12 Answer (2) 1
Ionization potential =Ionisation energy/e

13 13 Answer (2) 1

14 Answer (3) 1
Kinetic energy will increase if it comes from higher orbit to lower orbit.
14
K.E=-P.E/Z
So the potential energy will decrease.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 169


15 Answer (4) 1
1
Energy of different orbit is inversely proportional to n2
5
15.
Energy of different orbit is inversely proportional to n 2

SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)

16 Answer (1) 1
1
Fine structure of spectral lines is explained by Somerfield by using elliptical orbits of
6
electrons, also the spin of the electron
16. Fine structure of spectral lines.

17 17 Answer (1) 1

18 Answer (1) 1

18

19 Answer (2) 1
1
9

20 Answer (1) 1
2
0

SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)

21 21 Radius =0.53n2/z A0 1
For radius of Berillium to be same as Hydrogen ground state n2/Z =1
n2=4, n=2

22 Largest wavelength in ultraviolet region is for Lyman Series given by 1


4/3R=122nm,Smallest wavelength in infra red region is for Paschen series is given by
22 9/R=823 nm

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

23 Ans. It is the perpendicular distance of the initial velocity vector of the particle from 2
2 the centre of an atom. 1
3
In other words the perpendicular distance of line of initial velocity to the centre of
atom 1

24 Significance : It gives an estimate of size of nucleus of the Atom 1 2


2
from principle of conservation of angular momentum we get Estimation of size 1
4

25 25. When an electron makes a transition from higher to lower energy level , a photon 2
2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 170


5 is emitted. 1
the energy of photon is equal to the energy difference of two levels. This is called
Bohr’s frequency condition 1

26 26. For II excited state, n=2 1 2


2
By putting the value in general equation we obtain the desire result
6
1
r =n2 r0

27 27. Sol. Answer 2


2 Number of electron possible in a shell is given by
7
N = 2n2 1

where n is number of the shell


Total N = 2 + 8 + 18 + 32 = 60 atoms
27.Number of electron possible in a shell is given by
N = 2n2 1

28 The series will the highest frequencies is the Lyman series. It can be understood by 2
2 energy difference. 1
8
It is clear from series limit ,highest frequencies is the Lyman series 1

29 29. The difference in energy,between consecutive energy levels keeps reducing 1 2


it can easily predicted by the energy Transition equation of the line spectra, for
29
hydrogen atom. 1

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

30 When an electron makes a transition from higher to lower energy level Deexcitation 3
3 take place, 1
0
A photon is emitted which have the energy equal to the energy difference of two
levels. 1
transition from higher
a photon is emitted which results electromagnetic radiatiation
1

31 We know that radius for a particular orbit is proportional to 1 3


3
n2
1
From solving above equation we obtain the desire result 4:1, 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 171


32 32 From De-broglie relation & we know formulae for the radius For ground state 1 3
r0 =0.53A0
1

Using these equation we obtain the desire result. 1

33 For first excited statewe put the value of principal quantum nomber n in below 3
equation 1
33
V=c/137n
1
=1.09 x106 m/s
1

34 Negative sign implies that electron is bound . 3


1
34
Interaction is happening with the nucleus by electrostatic force of attraction
1

In case of binding magnitude of potential(algebraically P.E is negative for binded


system) energy is greater than as that of kinetic energy 1

35 For ground state n =1 and for first excited state n =2 3


1
35
E2-E1=-3.4+13.6=10.2 eV
1
35. E2-E1=-3.4+13.6 1

36 As r =1/m 3
3
(inversely related) 1.5
6
by solving we obtain
radius will be 1/200 times 1.5

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

37 (i)Ans-(c) Paschen 1
3
(ii) Ans-(b) n = 3,4,5 … to n = 2 1
7
(iii) Ans-(a) Lymen 1
(iv) Ans-(a) 13.6 eV 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 172


38 38 (i)Ans-(d) 1 4
(ii)Ans-(c) 1
(iii)Ans-(a) 1
(iv)Ans-(a) 1

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

39 R=1.097/m 5
C=3 X 108 m/s 1

h=6.63 x 10-34 J.S


The total energy of the electron in nth orbit is
En = -RCh/n2 1

For 1st orbit put n=1

E=-RCh/
n2 1

E=-RCh/
12
=RCh 1

E=-13.63 ev

40 E= -13.6 eV 5
(K.E)1=?
(P.E)1=?
i) K.E=-(T.E) 1
(K.E)1=-(T.E)1

=-E1=-(-13.6)ev 1

(K.E)1=+13.6 Ev 1/2

ii)We know that,

(P.E)1=2(T.E)1 1

=2E1

=2 X(-13.6) (P.E)=-27.2 eV 1/2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 173


KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN
KVS RO KOLKATA
SESSION 2023-24
STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS
CLASS-XII/XI PHYSICS
CHAPTER 13: NUCLEI

Q CORE QUESTION MARK


NO. CONCEPT/
FOCUSED-
FORMULA/
TARGATED
THEOREM
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)
1 Radius of If radius of the 13 Al27 nucleus is taken to be RAl, then the radius of 53Te 1
125
Nuclei nucleus is nearly
RαA1/3 (a)3/5 RAl (b) (13/53)1/3 RAl (c)( 53/13)1/3 RAl (d) 5/3 RAl
2 Size of atom The size of the atom is proportional to 1
RαA1/3 (a) A (b) A1/3 (c) A2/3 (d) A-1/3
3 Composition The atomic nucleus contains 1
of nucleus
(a) Protons and electrons(b)neutrons and electron
(c) protons and neutrons (d) Protons electrons and neutrons
4 Nuclear force Nuclear force is a ___________ and ___________force. 1
(A) Strong, long-range (B) Strong, short range
(C) Weak, long-range (D) Weak, short-range
5 Nuclear Two nuclei have mass number in the ratio 1 : 2. The 1
densities
ratio of their nuclear densities is
Independent
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 1 : 1 (D) Cannot be defined from mass number
of mass
ratio
number
6 mass of a The mass of a nucleus in its ground state is 1
nucleus
(A) less than the total mass of neutrons and protons.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 174


(B) greater than the total mass of neutrons and protons.
(C) equal to the total mass of neutrons and protons.
(D) equal to the total mass of neutron, protons and electrons.
7 Characteristics Two protons are kept at a separation of 40 Å. Fn is the nuclear force and 1
of nuclear Fe is the electrostatic force between them. Then
force
(a) Fn << Fe (b) Fn = Fe (c) Fn >> Fe (d) Fn ≈ Fe
8 Characteristics The correct statements about the nuclear force is/are 1
of nuclear
(a) charge independent (b) short range force (c) non-conservative force
force
(d) all of these.
9 Nuclear In any nuclear fission process, ratio of mass of daughter nucleus to mass 1
fission of parent nucleus is
(a) less than 1 (b) greater than 1 (c) equal to 1
(d) depends on the mass of parent nucleus.
10 Nuclear fusion Light energy emitted by star is due to 1
(a) breaking of nuclei (b) joining of nuclei (c) burning of nuclei
(d) reflection of solar light
11 Size of nuclei If R is the radius and A is the mass number, then log R versus log A 1
graph will be
(a) a straight line (b) a parabola (c) an ellipse (d) none of these.
12 Composition ___________ has the mass closest to the mass of positron. 1
of nucleus
(A) Proton (B) Neutron (C) Electron (D) Neutrino
14 Nuclear power Which of the following material will be the best moderator for a nuclear 1
plant power plant?
(A) Lighter element (B) Heavier element (C) Both of the above (D)
None of the above
15 Binding The binding energies per nucleon of deuteron (1H2) and helium (2He4) 1
Energy nuclei are 1.1 MeV and 7 MeV respectively. If two deuterons fuse
together to form a helium nucleus, then energy produced is:
(a) 5.9 MeV (b) 23.6 MeV (c) 26.9 MeV (d) 32.4 MeV
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 1
16-20)
Assertion: (A). 1
Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS
GIVEN IN ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 175


of A.
b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct
explanation of A.
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.
16 Isotope, Assertion (A): Two atoms of different elements having same mass 1
isobar, isotone number but different atomic numbers are called isobars.
Reason (R): Atomic number is the number of protons present and atomic
number is the total number of protons and neutrons present in a nucleus.
17 Pairing of Assertion (A): Nuclear force is same between neutron-neutron, proton- 1
nucleons proton and neutron- proton.
Reason (R): Nuclear force is charge independent.
18 binding Assertion (A): The binding energy per nucleon, for nuclei with mass 1
energy number (A) > 56 decreases with A.
Reason (R): Nuclear force is weak in heavier nuclei.
19 Nuclear Assertion (A): Density of all the nuclei is same. 1
density
Reason (R): Radius of nucleus is directly proportional to the cube root of
mass number.
20 Nuclear Assertion (A) : For the fission of heavy nuclei, neutrons are more 1
fission effective than protons.
Reason (R) : Neutrons are heavier than protons.
SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING
QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)
21 The binding energies per nucleon for deuteron and an alpha-particle are 1
x1 and x2 respectively. Find the amount of energy released in the
following reactions.
2
1H +1H2= 2He4+Q.
22 Why do stable nuclei never have more protons than neutrons? 1
SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO
23-29)
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26] 2
3
23 Binding 2He and 1H3 nuclei have the same mass number. Do they have the same 2
energy binding energy?
24 Nuclear A heavy nucleus P of mass number 240 and binding energy 7.6 MeV per 2
reaction and nucleon splits into two nuclei Q and R of mass numbers 110 and 130 and
energy. binding energy per nucleon 8.5 MeV and 8.4 MeV, respectively.
Calculate the energy released in the fission.

25 nuclear fusion On the basis of which relation mass to energy conversion in nuclear 2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 176


and fission fusion and fission is explained ?
26 Difference Write two characteristic features of nuclear force which distinguish it 2
between from Coulomb‘s force.
fundamental
forces
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING
OUTCOME OF THE CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]
27 Definition of What do you mean by mass defect of a nucleus? 2
mass defect
28 Nuclear Show that the density of nucleus over a wide range of nuclei is constant 2
densities and independent of mass number.
Independent
of mass
number
29 Radius of Two nuclei have mass numbers in the ratio 1 : 8. What is the ratio of 2
Nuclei their nuclear radii?
RαA1/3
SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33) 3
30 Energy (a) Give one point of difference between nuclear fission and nuclear 3
released in fusion.
nuclear fission
(b) Suppose we consider fission of a 26Fe56 into two equal fragments of
28
13Al nucleus. Is the fission energetically possible? Justify your answer
by working out Q value of the process. Given (m) 26Fe56 = 55.93494 u
and (m) 13Al28 = 27.98191.
31 Binding Explain the processes of nuclear fission and nuclear fusion by using the 3
energy graph plot of binding energy per nucleon (BE/A) versus the mass number A.
32 Nuclear Calculate for how many years will the fusion of 2.0 kg deuterium keep 3
fission 800 W electric lamp glowing. Take the fusion reaction as 1H2 +1H2 →
3 1
2He + 0n + 3.27 MeV.

33 Isotope, (a) Distinguish between isotopes and isobars, giving one example for 3
isobar, isotone each.
(b) Why is the mass of a nucleus always less than the sum of the masses
of its constituents? Write one example to justify your answer.
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING
OUTCOME OF THE CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)
34 PE vs r graph. Draw a graph showing the variation of potential energy between a pair of 3
nucleons as a function of their separation. Indicate the regions in which
the nuclear force is (i) attractive, (ii) repulsive. Write two important
conclusions which you can draw regarding the nature of the nuclear
forces.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 177


35 Binding (a)Draw the graph showing the variation of binding energy per nucleon 3
energy graph with the mass number for a large number of nuclei 2< A < 240. What are
the main inferences from the graph?
(b)How do you explain the constancy of binding energy in the range 30
< A < 170 using the property that the nuclear force is short-ranged?
Explain with the help of this plot the release of energy in the processes
of nuclear fission and fusion.
36 Consider the fusion reaction: 4He + 4He → 8Be For the reaction, find (i) 3
mass defect (ii) Q-value (iii) Is such a fusion energetically favourable?
Atomic mass of 8Be is 8.0053 u and that of 4He is 4.0026 u.
SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-
38)
37 Discovery of Discovery of Nucleus: 4
Nucleus
The nucleus was first discovered in 1911 by Lord Rutherford and his
associates by experiments on scattering of a-particles by atoms. He
found that the scattering results could be explained, if atoms consist of a
small, central, massive and positive core surrounded by orbiting
electrons. The experimental results indicated that the size of the nucleus
is of the order of 10–14 m and is
thus 10000 times smaller than the size of atom.
(i)Ratio of mass of nucleus with mass of atom is approximately
(a) 1 (b) 10 (c) 103 (d) 1010.
(ii) Masses of nuclei of hydrogen, deuterium and tritium are in ratio
(a) 1 : 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 1 : 1 (c) 1 : 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 2 : 4
(iii) Nuclides with same neutron number but different atomic number are
(a) isobars (b) isotopes(c) isotones (d) none of these
(iv) If R is the radius and A is the mass number, then log R versus log A
graph will be
(a) a straight line (b) a parabola(c) an ellipse (d) none of these.
38 India‘s atomic India‘s atomic energy programme : 4
energy
The atomic energy programme in India was launched around the time of
programme
independence under the leadership of Homi J. Bhabha (1909-1966). An
early historic achievement was the design and construction of the first
nuclear reactor in India (named Apsara) which went critical on August 4,
1956. India indigenously designed and constructed plutonium plant at
Trombay, which ushered in the technology of fuel reprocessing
(separating useful fissile and fertile nuclear materials from the spent fuel
of a reactor). Research reactors that have been subsequently
commissioned include ZERLINA, PURNIMA (I, II and III), DHRUVA
and KAMINI. KAMINI is the country‘s first large research reactor that
uses U-233 as fuel. The main objectives of the Indian Atomic Energy
programme are to provide safe and reliable electric power for the
country‘s social and economic progress and to be self reliant in all
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 178
aspects of nuclear technology. Exploration of atomic minerals in India
undertaken since the early fifties has indicated that India has limited
reserves of uranium, but fairly abundant reserves of thorium.
Accordingly, our country has adopted a three stage strategy of nuclear
power generation. The first stage involves the use of natural uranium as
a fuel, with heavy water as moderator. The Plutonium-239 obtained from
reprocessing of the discharged fuel from the reactors then serves as a
fuel for the second stage — the fast breeder reactors. They are so called
because they use fast neutrons for sustaining the chain reaction (hence
no moderator is needed) and, besides generating power, also
breed more fissile species (plutonium) than they consume. The third
stage, most significant in the long term, involves using fast breeder
reactors to produce fissile Uranium-233 from Thorium-232 and to build
power reactors based on them.
(i) India‘s atomic energy programme was launched by:
(A) Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar (B) Homi J. Bhabha (C) Meghnad Saha
(D) Daulat Singh Kothari
(ii) First nuclear reactor of India :
(A) APSARA (B) ZERLINA (C) DHRUBA (D) KAMINI
(iii) Which one of the following is not a nuclear reactor ?
(A) PURNIMA (B) DHRUVA(C) KAMINI (D) ARYABHATTA
(iv) The main objectives of the Indian Atomic Energy
programme :
(A) Development of Nuclear weapons for success in warfare (B)
Generation of safe and reliable electric power (C) Efficient medical
treatment (D) To breed more fissile species
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)
39 Graph 5
showing the
variation of
potential
energy
between a pair
of nucleons as
a function of
their
separation.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 179


40 Binding 5
energy/ mass
number vs
Mass number
graph

Sl no. Important Video link [OPTIONAL]


1
2
3

Sl no. Important Facts/ information you like to share


OR [OPTIONAL]
Short cut Tips
1
2
3

ANSWER KEY:
Q.NO. Answer MARK
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]
1 (d) 5/3 RAl 1
2 (b) A1/3 1
3 (c) protons and neutrons 1
4 (B) Strong, short range 1
5 (C) 1 : 1 Explanation: Since, nuclear density does not depend upon the mass number. 1

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 180


Hence, density ratio will be 1 : 1.
6 (A) less than the total mass of neutrons and protons. 1
Explanation: Since, the mass depends upon energy. Also, ground state energy is lesser
than first excited energy therefore the mass of nucleus would be lesser than the mass of
neutrons and protons.
7 (c) Fn >> Fe 1
8 (d) all of these. 1
9 (a) : In fission process, when a parent nucleus breaks into daughter products, then some 1
mass is lost in the form of energy. Thus, mass of fission products < mass of parent
nucleus. ⇒ Mass of fission products Mass of parent nucleus <1
10 (b) joining of nuclei 1
11 (a) the graph between log A and log R is a straight line. 1
12 (C) Electron 1
13 B) Neutron 1
14 Option (A) is correct. 1
Explanation: Neutron will be slowed down more if the size of moderator atom is closer
to a neutron. For this reason , lighter element will be more efficient moderator.
15 (b) 23.6 MeV 1
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)
16 Option (B) is correct. 1
Explanation: Two atoms of different elements having same mass number but different
atomic
numbers are called isobars. The assertion is true.
Atomic number is the number of protons present and atomic mass number is the total
number of protons and neutrons present in a nucleus. The reason is also true. But the
reason does not explain the assertion.
17 Option (A) is correct. 1
18 Option (C) is correct. 1
Explanation: From the binding energy per nucleon vs. mass number, we find that
binding energy per nucleon is maximum at A=56. After that, binding energy per
nucleon decreases as A increases. So, assertion is true. Nuclear force remains same for
all nuclei. Hence the reason is false.
19 Option (A) is correct. 1
20 (b) : A neutron is slightly heavier than a proton. As neutrons are charge less particles 1
they penetrate matter more than protons. Therefore, they are more effective than
protons in fission reactions.
SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN
NO 21-22)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 181


21 4(x2– x1). 1
22 The stability of a nucleus depends on its neutron to proton ratio. More is the number of 1
protons in the nucleus, greater is the electrical forces between them. Therefore more
neutrons are needed to provide the strong attractive force necessary to keep the nucleus
stable.
SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)
23 No, the binding energy of 1H3 is greater. This is because 2He3 has 2 proton and 1 2
neutron, whereas 1H3 has 1 proton and 2 neutron. Repulsive force between protons in
3
1H is absent.

24 Total BE of Q and R = (935 +1092) = 2027 MeV. Total energy released in the fission = 2
2027 – 1824= 203 MeV
25 Since, Nuclear Fission and Fusion are processes in which mass is converted into 2
energy. Hence,
nuclear fission and fusion can be explained on the basis of Einstein mass-energy
equivalence
relation.
26 Characteristic Features of Nuclear Force 2
(i) Nuclear forces are short range attractive forces (range 2 to 3 fm) while Coulomb‘s
forces have range upto infinity and may be attractive or repulsive.
(ii) Nuclear forces are charge independent forces; while Coulomb's force acts only
between
charged particles.
27 The difference between the rest mass of a nucleus and the sum of the rest masses of its 2
constituent nucleons is called its mass defect.
28 Correct expolanation. 2
29 Nuclear radius, R = R0 A1/3=(1/8)1/3=1/2. 2
SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)
30 One difference between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion. 3
Calculating Q = (m) Fe – 2 (m) Al c2= – 26.90 MeV
31 Correct graph and correct explanation. 3
32 3

33 (a) Isotopes have same atomic number but different mass number & isobars have same 3

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 182


mass
number but different atomic number. Examples of Isotopes 6C12,6C14 Examples of
Isobars 2He3, 1H3 .
(b) Mass of a nucleus is less than its constituents because it is in the bound state. Some
mass is converted into binding energy which is energy equivalent of mass defect e.g.,
mass of 8O16 nucleus is less than the sum of masses of 8 protons and 8 neutrons.
34 Correct graph. 3
Conclusions:
(i) The potential energy is minimum at a distance r0 of about 0.8 fm.
(ii) Nuclear force is attractive for distance larger than r0.
(iii) Nuclear force is repulsive if two are separated by distance less than r0.
(iv) Nuclear force decreases very rapidly at r0/equilibrium position.
35 The variation of binding energy per nucleon versus mass number is shown in figure. 3
Inferences from graph
1. The nuclei having mass number below 20 and above 180 have relatively small
binding energy and hence they are unstable.
2. The nuclei having mass number 56 and about 56 have maximum binding energy –
8·8 MeV
and so they are most stable.
36 4He + 4He → 8Be + Q 3
(i) Dm = 2 × 4.0026 – 8.0053 = 8.0052 – 8.0053= – 0.0001 amu
(ii) Q = (2mHe – mBe) c2= (2 × 4.0026 – 8.0053) × 931MeV= –0.0931 MeV = –93.1
keV.
(iii) Since Q is negative, the fusion is not energetically favourable.
SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)
37 ( i) a (ii)a (iii)c (iv)a 4
38 (i)B (ii)A (iii)D (iv)A 4
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)
39 (a) Drawing the plot 5

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 183


(b) Finding values of a and b

40 A) S,W,X 5
B) Z=Z1+Z2
A=A1+A2
C) Reason for low binding energy :In heavier nuclei, the Coulombian repulsive effects
can increase considerably and can match/offset the attractive effects of the nuclear
forces. This can result in such nuclei being unstable.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 184


KENDRITYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

KVS RO KOLKATA

SESSION 2023-24

STUDY MATERIAL FOR SLOW ACHIEVERS

CLASS-XII/XI PHYSICS

CHAPTER: 14 SEMICONDUCTOR
ELECTRONICS: MATERIALS,DEVICES AND
SIMPLE CIRCUITS

Q CORE QUESTION MARK


NO. CONCEPT/
FOCUSED-
FORMULA/
TARGATED
THEOREM
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15)
1 Core Concept With fall of temperature, the forbidden energy gap of a semiconductor 1
(a) increases
(b) decreases
(c) sometimes increases and sometimes decreases
(d) remains unchanged
2 Core Concept To obtain p-type silicon semiconductor, we need to dope pure silicon 1
with:
(a) aluminium
(b) phosphorus
(c) oxygen
(d)germanium
3 Targated Energy bands in solids are a consequence of: 1
Theorem
(a) Ohm‘s Law
(b) Pauli‘s exclusion principle
(c) Bohr‘s theory
(d) Heisenberg‘s uncertainty principle
4 Core Concept In a semi conductor what are responsible for conduction: 1
(a) only electron
(b) electron and hole both
(c) only hole

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 185


(d) None of these
5 Core Concept On heating, resistance of semiconductors: 1
(a) decreases
(b) increases
(c) remains same
(d) first increases then decreases
6 Core Concept In intrinsic semiconductor at room temperature, the number of electrons 1
and
holes are:
(a) equal
(b) unequal
(c) infinite
(d) zero
7 Core Concept In full wave rectifier, input a.c. current has a frequency v. The output 1
frequency of current is :
(a) ν/2
(b) ν
(c) 2ν
(d) None
8 Core Concept In semi conductor, at room temperature : 1
(a) the valence bond is partially empty and the conduction band is
partially filled
(b) the valence band is completely filled and the conduction band is
partially filled
(c) the valence band is completely filled
(d) the conduction band is completely empty
9 Core Concept The material most commonly used to manufacture electronic solid state 1
devices
is :
(a) copper
(b) silicon
(c) germanium
(d) aluminium
10 Core Concept On applying reverse bias to a junction diode, it: 1
(a) lowers the potential barrier

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 186


(b) raises the potential barrier
(c) increases the majority carrier current
(d) decreases the minority carrier current
11 Core Concept The intrinsic semiconductor becomes an insulator at: 1
(a) 0 C (b) −100 C
(c) 300 K (d) 0 K
12 Core Concept In a pure semiconductor crystal if current flows due to breakage of 1
crystal bonds, then semiconductor is called as:
(a)Acceptor
(b) Donor
(c) Intrinsic semiconductor
(d) Extrinsic semiconductor
14 Core Concept Doping materials are called impurities because they 1
(a) change the number of chaise carriers.
(b) alter the crystal structure.
(c) change chemical properties.
(d) make semiconductor less pure.
15 Core Concept On doping an intrinsic semiconductor with a group V element, free 1
electrons in the conduction band are the Majority charge carriers and the
resulting semiconductor has a net:
(a) negative charge
(b) positive charge
(c) charge zero
(d) negative, zero or positive charge
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 1
16-20)
Assertion: (A). 1
Reason: (R)
CHOOSE THE CORRECT OPTION AS PER THE STATEMENTS
GIVEN IN ASSERTION AND REASON:
a) Assertion and Reason both are correct and R is the correct explanation
of A.
b) Assertion and Reason both are correct but R is not the correct
explanation of A.
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 187


d) Assertion and Reason both are incorrect.
16 Core Concept Assertion : A pure semiconductor has negative temperature coefficient 1
of resistance.
Reason : In a semiconductor on raising the temperature, more charge
carriers are released,conductance increases and resistance decreases.
17 Core Concept Assertion : Silicon is preferred over germanium for making 1
semiconductor devices.
Reason : The energy gap in germanium is more than the energy gap in
silicon.
18 Core Concept Assertion : When two semi conductors of p and n type are brought in 1
contact, they form p-n junction which act like a rectifier.
Reason : A rectifier is used to convert alternating current into direct
current.
19 Core Concept Assertion : The diffusion current in a p-n junction is from the p-side to 1
the n-side.
Reason : The diffusion current in a p-n junction is greater than the drift
current when the junction is in forward biased.
20 Core Concept Assertion : Doping a germanium crystal with indium results in the 1
formation of n-type germanium crystal.
Reason : Indium is a pentavalent impurity atom.
SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING
QUESTIONS: (QN NO 21-22)
21 Focused Three photo diodes D1, D2, and D3 are made of semiconductors having 1
formula band
gaps of 2.5eV, 2eV and 3eV respectively. Which one will be able to
detect light
of wavelength 6000Å?
22 Targated In a given diagram, is the diode reverse (or) forward biased? 1
Theorem

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO


23-29)
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26] 2
23 Core Concept Mention any TWO differences between an intrinsic semiconductor and a
p-type semiconductor.
24 Core Concept Give reason, why a p-type semiconductor crystal is electrically neutral 2
although nh >> ne?
25 Targated In the given following diagram ‗S‘ is a semiconductor. Would you 2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 188


Theorem increase or decrease the value of R to keep the reading of the ammeter A
constant when S is heated? Give reason for your answer.

26 Core Concept In half wave rectification, what is the output frequency, if the input 2
frequency is 50 Hz. What is the output frequency of a full wave rectifier
for the same input frequency?
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/
LEARNING OUTCOME OF THE CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]
27 Targated A germanium diode is preferred to a silicon one for rectifying small 2
Theorem voltages. Explain why?
28 Targated Which of the diodes are forward biased and which are reverse biased? 2
Theorem

29 Targated Draw the output signal in a p-n junction diode when a square input 2
Theorem signal of 10 V as shown in the figure is applied across it.

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)


FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33) 3
30 Core Concept In the case of n-type Si semiconductor, the donor level is slightly below
the bottom of conduction band. whereas in p-type semiconductor, the
acceptor energy level is slightly above the top of the valence band.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 189


Explain, what role do these energy levels play in conduction and valence
bands?
31 Core Concept Distinguish between n-type and p-type semi-conductors on the basis of 3
energy band diagrams. Compare their conductivities at absolute zero
temperature and at room temperature.
32 Focused A photodiode is fabricated from a semiconductor with a band gap of 3
formula 2.8eV. Can it detect a wavelength of 600nm? Justify?
33 Core Concept (i)What are the important processes that occur during the formation of a 3
p-n
Junction ?
ii) How is a p-n junction diode connected to get a forward bias and
reverse bias.
iii) Draw the V-I characteristics corresponding to forward and reverse
bias.
MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/
LEARNING OUTCOME OF THE CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)
34 Targated Determine the current through resistance ―R‖ in each circuit. Diodes D1 3
Theorem and D2 are identical and ideal.

35 Core Concept Draw a circuit diagram to show how a photodiode is biased. Draw its 3
characteristic curves for two different illumination intensities.
36 Core Concept (a)If the frequency of light falling on a metal is doubled, what will be the 3
effect on photocurrent and the maximum kinetic energy of emitted
photoelectrons? (b) Assuming that the two diodes D1 and D2 used in the
electric circuit are ideal, find out the value of current flowing through
the 1Ω resistor.

(c) Green light ejects photoelectrons from a given photosensitive

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 190


surface, whereas yellow light does not. What will happen in the case of
violet and red light? Give reason for your answer.
SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-
38)
37 Core Concept A Photodiode is again a special purpose p-n junction diode fabricated 4
with a transparent window to allow light to fall on the diode. It is
operated under reverse bias. When the photodiode is illuminated with
light (photons) with energy (hν) greater than the energy gap (E) of the
semiconductor, then electron-hole pairs are generated due to the
absorption of photons. The diode is fabricated such that the generation
of e-h pairs takes place in or near the depletion region of the diode. Due
to electric field of the junction, electrons and holes are separated before
they recombine. The direction of the electric field is such that electrons
reach n-side and holes reach p-side. Electrons are collected on n-side
and holes are collected on p-side giving rise to an emf. When an external
load is connected, current flows. The magnitude of the photocurrent
depends on the intensity of incident light.
I. Photo Diode is
a) forward biased b) reverse biased c) Not biased
II. Which of the following is true about photodiode?
a) E > hv b) E = hv c) E < hv d) None of these
III. Magnitude of photocurrent depends on
a) Intensity of light b) Biasing
c) Potential d) None of these
IV. Electrons and holes are separated before they recombine by:
a) Diffusion current
b) Drift current
c) Electric field
d) Electric potential
38 Core Concept This diode is a heavily doped p-n junction which under forward bias 4
emits spontaneous radiation. The diode is encapsulated with a
transparent cover so that emitted light can come out. When the diode is
forward biased, electrons are sent from n → p (where they are minority
carriers) and holes are sent from p → n (where they are minority
carriers). At the junction boundary the concentration of minority carriers
increases compared to the equilibrium concentration (i.e., when there is
no bias). Thus at the junction boundary on either side of the junction,
excess minority carriers are there which recombine with majority
carriers near the junction. On recombination, the energy is released in
the form of photons. Photons with energy equal to or slightly less than
the band gap are emitted. When the forward current of the diode is
small, the intensity of light emitted is small. As the forward current
increases, intensity of light increases and reaches a maximum. Further

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 191


increase in the forward current results in decrease of light intensity.
I. Which special purpose diode is mentioned above?
a) Solar cell b)LED
c) Photodiode d) Zener Diode
II. Which of the following device is forward biased?
a) Solar cell b)LED
c) Photodiode d) Zener Diode
III) Energy is released in the form of
a) Electron
b) Proton
c) Photon
d) None of these
IV. Which of the following is false?
a) As forward current increases, intensity of light increases.
b) Increase in further forward current decreases the intensity of light.
c) Photons with energy greater than band gap is emitted.
d) Photons with energy less than band gap is emitted.
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)
39 Core Concept Explain the working of p-n junction diode as a full wave rectifier? Draw 5
the input output waveforms.
40 Core Concept Draw the Energy band diagrams for (i) insulator (ii) conductor and (iii) 5
pure semiconductor. How does the energy band, for a pure
semiconductor, get affected when this semiconductor is doped with (a)
an acceptor impurity and (b) donor impurity? Hence discuss why the
‗holes‘, and the ‗electrons‘ respectively, become the ‗majority charge
carriers‘ in these two cases?

Some More Important Questions


FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: [Qn 23-26]

41 Basic of How is an n-type semiconductor formed?Name the major charge carriers in it 2


Semiconductor ?

42 Basic of How is an p-type semiconductor formed?Name the major charge carriers in it 2


Semiconductor ?

43 Basic of What are holes?Give their important characteristics . 2


Semiconductor

44 Doping What is doping? Why is it done? 2

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 192


MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF
THE CHAPTER) [Qn 27-29]

45 Basic of How does the conductivity of a semiconductor change with the rise in its 2
Semiconductor temperature? why?

46 Application of Draw and explain the output waveform across the load resistor R,if the input 2
forward bias waveform is as shown in fig given below.
and reverse
bias.

47 Application of A square wave (-1 V to 1 V) is applied to p-n junction diode as shown in given 2
forward bias fig .Draw the output waveform.
and reverse
bias.

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS: (Qn 30-33)

48 Difference b/w Write any two distinguished feathers b/w conductors, semiconductors and 3
conductors, insulators on the basis of energy band diagram.
semiconductors
and insulators

49 p-n junction Write briefly the two important processes that occur during the formation of 3
diode p-n junction .With the help of necessary diagrams ,explain the term
“”depletion region” and “barrier potential”.

50 Forward and Explain briefly with the help of circuit diagrams,the forward and the reverse 3
reverse bias biasing of a p-n junction diode.Also draw their characteristics curve in the
two cases.

51 Full wave Draw the circuit diagram of a full wave rectifier .Explain its working showing 3
rectifier its input and output waveforms .

MOST IMPORTANT QUESTIONS (AS PER CONCEPT/ LEARNING OUTCOME OF


THE CHAPTER) (Qn 34-36)

52 Basic of P-N With the help of suitable diagram ,explain the formation of depilation region 3
junction diode and potential barrier in a p-n junction .How does its width change when the
junction is (i) forward biased and (ii) reverse biased ?

53 Rectifier An a.c signal is fed into two circuits X and Y and the corresponding output in 3
the two cases have the wavefronts shown in fig given below.Name the circuit
X and Y .Also draw their detailed circuit diagram.

54 V-I a)Explain how a potential barrier is developed in a p-n junction diode. 3


Characteristics
b) Draw the circuit arrangement for studying the V-I characteristics of a p-n
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 193
graph junction diode in reverse bias.Plot the V-I characteristics in this case.

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASEDQUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)

55 Application of In the following diagrams ,indicate which of the diodes are forward bias and 4
the concept of which are reverse biased and why?
forward and
reverse bias.

56 Application of Determine the currents through the resistances of the circuits shown in fig: 4
the concept of
forward and
reverse bias.

SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)

57 p-n junction i)Draw the circuit diagram of a p-n junction diode in (i) forward bias .How are 5
diode. these circuits used to study the V-I characterists.How do we infer from these
characteristics ,that a diode can be used to rectify a.c?

ii)A battery of 2 V may be connected across the points A and B ,as shown in
the fig.Find the current drawn from the battery if the positive terminal is
connected to (a) the point A and (b) the point B.Assume that the diodes are
ideal.

58 Semiconductor Draw the “Energy band”,diagrams for a (i) pure semiconductors (ii) Insulator. 5
How does the energy band ,for a pure semiconductor ,get effected when this
semiconductor is doped with (a)an acceptor impurity (b) donor impurity?
Hence discuss why the ‘holes’ and the ‘electrons’ respectively become the
‘majority charge carriers’ in these two cases.

ANSWER KEY:

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 194


Q.NO. Answer MARK
SECTION -A: MCQ (QN NO 1-15) [Answer explanation]
1 d 1
2 a 1
3 b 1
4 b 1
5 a 1
6 a 1
7 c 1
8 a 1
9 b 1
10 b 1
11 d 1
12 c 1
13 b 1
14 b 1
15 c 1
SECTION -B: ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS: (QN NO 16-20)
16 a 1
17 c 1
18 b 1
19 b 1
20 d 1
SECTION -C: CREATIVE AND CRITICAL THINKING QUESTIONS: (QN
NO 21-22)
21 Energy of a photon = hv = hc/λ=2.06eV. hence D2 as it has band gap less than the 1
radiation
22 Reverse biased. 1
SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 23-29)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 195


23 2

24 In a p-type semiconductor, the trivalent impurity atom shares its three valence 2
electrons with the three tetravalent host atoms while the fourth bond remains
unbounded. The impurity atom as a whole is electrical neutral. Hence the p-type
semiconductor is also neutral.
25 The value of ‗R‘ would be increased since the resistance of ‗S‘, a semi conductor 2
decreases on heating.
26 Output frequency of half wave rectifier -50 Hz ,Frequency of full wave rectifier= 2 x 2
50=100Hz
27 Because the energy gap for Ge (Eg = 0.7 ev) is smaller than the energy gap for Si (Eg 2
= 1.1eV) or barrier potential for Ge<Si.
28 (i) is forward biased, remaining all reverse biased 2
29 The diode will conduct only when it is forward biased. Therefore, till the input 2
voltage is + 5 V, we will get an output across R, accordingly the output waveform
shown in the figure.

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)


30 Role of energy levels in conduction and valence bands : In the energy band diagram 3
of n-type Si semiconductor, the donor energy level ED is slightly below the
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 196
conduction band and electrons from this level moves into conduction band with very
small supply of energy. At room temperature, most of the donor atoms get ionised,
but very few (~ 10-12) atoms of Si atom get ionised. So the conduction band will
have most of the electrons coming from donor impurities. For p-type semiconductor,
the acceptance energy level EA is slightly above the valence band. With very small
supply of energy, an electron from the valence band can jump to the level EA and
ionise the acceptor negatively. At room temperature, most of the acceptor atoms get
ionised leaving holes in the valence band
31 3

32 Energy corresponding to wavelength 600 nm is E=hc/  = 6.6x10-34 x 3x108 joule = 3


0.2eV. 600x10-9 It cannot detect because E < Eg
33 (i)Drift and diffusion of charge and formation of barrier potential. Two important 3
processes occur during the formation of p-n junction - diffusion and drift.
The motion of majority charge carriers give rise to diffusion current.
Due to the space charge on n-side junction and negative space charge region on p-side
the electric field is set up and potential barrier develops at the junction Due to electric
field eon p-side moves to n and holes from n-side to p-side which is called drift
current.
In equilibrium state, there is no current across p-n junction and potential barrier
across pn junction has maximum value .
The width of the depletion region and magnitude of barrier potential depends on the
nature of semiconductor and doping concentration on two sides of p-n junction.

(ii)

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 197


34 In circuit (i) Both D1 and D2 are forward biased hence both will conduct current and 3
resistance of each diode is ―0‖.Therefore I = 3/15 = 0.2 A Diode D1 is forward bias
and D2 is reverse bias, therefore resistance of diode D1 is ―0‖ and resistance of D2 is
infinite. Hence D1 will conduct and D2 do not conduct. No current flows in the
circuit.
35 3

36 (a) There is no change in the photo electric current Kinetic energy increases 3
(b) D1 forward biased hence resistance 0 D2 reverse biased hence resistance infinity
Therefore, resistance = 3Ω I =V/R =2A
(c) Violet light – photo electric emission and red light no emission Energy of incident
radiation is hc/λ . .λv
SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS: (QN NO 37-38)
37 I. B 4
II. C
III. A

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 198


IV. C
38 I. B 4
II. B
III. C
IV. C
SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 39-40)
39 A Rectifier is a device which converts AC into DC. Using two diodes and a centre 5
tapped transformer, a full wave rectifier can be constructed, as shown in figure.
During the positive half cycle of input AC, the diode D1 conducts and D2 do not
conduct and the current flows from B to A. During the positive half cycle of input
AC, the diode D2 conducts and D1 do not conduct and the current flows from B to A.

40 Distinguishing features between conductors, semiconductors and insulators : (i) 5


Insulator. In insulator, the valence band is completely filled. The conduction band is
empty and forbidden energy gap is quite large. So no electron is able to go from
valence band to conduction band even if electric field is applied. Hence electrical
conduction is impossible. The solid/ substance is an insulator.
(ii) Conductors (Metals). In metals, either the conduction band is partially filled or the
conduction and valence band partly overlap each other. If small electric field is
applied across the metal, the free electrons start moving in a direction opposite to the
direction of electric field. Hence, metal behaves as a conductor.
(iii) Semiconductors. At absolute zero kelvin, the conduction band is empty and the
valence band is filled. The material is insulator at low temperature. However the
energy gap between valence band and conduction band is small. At room

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 199


temperature, some valence electrons acquire thermal energy and jump to conduction
band where they can conduct electricity. The holes left behind in valence band act as
a positive charge carrier.
‗Energy Band‘ diagrams :

(a) When the semiconductor is doped with an acceptor impurity, it results in an


additional energy level a little above the top of the valence band. (b) The donor
impurity results in an additional energy level a little below the bottom of the
conduction band. In the first case, electrons from the valence band, easily jump over
to the acceptor level, leaving ‗holes‘ behind. Hence, ‗holes‘ becomes the majority
charge carriers. In the second case, electrons from the donor level, easily ‗jump over‘
to the conduction band. Hence, electrons become the majority charge carriers.

SECTION -D: VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS:

41 2

42 2

43 Hole : The vacancy of electron is a semi conductor is known as the hole. 2

Characteristics of Holes :

(i) Holes are heavier than electrons.

(ii) Mobility of holes is less than mobility of electrons.

(iii) They behave as if they are positively charged particles

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 200


44 2

45 2

46 2

47 2

SECTION -E: SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (QN NO 30-36)

48 3

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 201


49 For “Depletion Region” follow Question answer no-34. 3

Barrier Potential: The electric field formed in the depletion region acts as a barrier. External
energy must be applied to get the electrons to move across the barrier of the electric field. The
potential difference required to move the electrons through the electric field is called the
barrier potential.

50 Follow Question answer no-34 3

51 Follow Question answer no-35 3

52 Formation of Depletion Layer: 3

At the junction there is diffusion of charge carriers due to thermal agitation; so that some of
electrons of n-region diffuse to p-region while some of holes of p-region diffuse into n-region.
KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 202
Some charge carriers combine with opposite charges to neutralise each other. Thus near the
junction there is an excess of positively charged ions in n-region and an excess of negatively
charged ions in p-region. This sets up a potential difference and hence an internal electric field
Ei across the junctions. The field Ei is directed from n-region to p-region. This field stops the
further diffusion of charge carriers. Thus the layers (= 10-4 cm 10-6 cm) on either side of the
junction becomes free from mobile charge carriers and hence is called the depletion layer. The
symbol of p-n junction diode is shown in Fig.

Effect of Forward and Reverse Bias:

(i) Under forward biasing the applied potential difference causes a field which acts opposite to
the potential barrier. This results in reducing the potential barrier, and hence the width of
depletion layer decreases.

(ii) Under reverse biasing the applied potential difference causes a field which is in the same
direction as the field due to internal potential barrier. This results in an increase in barrier
voltage and hence the width of depletion layer increases.

53 X- half wave rectifier. 3

Y-full wave rectifier.

Circuit:

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 203


54 3

For graph please see Q-40.

SECTION -F: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS:

55 4

56 4

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 204


SECTION -G: LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS:

57 The circuit arrangement for studying V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode in forward bias 5
is given below.

The circuit arrangement for studying V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode in reverse bias is
given below.

Typical V-I characteristic of a silicon diode is given below:

ii) (a) When positive terminal of the battery is connected to point A ,diode D1 gets forward

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 205


biased and offers zero resistance and diode D2 gets reverse biased and offers infinite resistance
.

Current drawn from the circuit (2V/10 ohm)= 0.2 A.

(b) When positive terminal of the battery is connected to point B,diode D1 gets reverse biased
and offers infinite resistance and diode D2 gets forward biased and offers zero resistance .

Current drawn from the circuit (2V/20 ohm)= 0.1 A.

58 The required energy band diagram are as shown : 5

(a) When the semiconductor is doped with an acceptor impurity there is an additional energy
level a Iittle above the top of the valence band. (b) The donor impurity results in an additional
energy level a little below the bottom of the conduction band. (AIso accept diagrammatic
representations) In the first case, electrons, from the valence band, easily jump over to the
acceptor level, leaving'holes' behind. Hence,'holes' become the majority charge carriers. In the
second case, electrons from the donor level, easily ' jump over' to the conduction band. Hence,
electrons become the majority charge carriers.

KVS RO KOLKATA |STUDY MATERIAL CLASS XII-2023 206


CLASS : XII

SESSION: 2023-24

CBSE SAMPLE QUESTION PAPER

SUBJECT: PHYSICS (THEORY)

Maximum Marks: 70 Time Allowed: 3 hours.


General Instructions:

(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.


(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based
of 1 mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C
contains seven questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study
based questions of four marks each and Section E contains three long answer
questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one
question in Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section
D and all three questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in
such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
i. c = 3 x 108 m/s
ii. me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
iii. e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
iv. µ0 = 4π x 10-7 Tm𝑨−𝟏
v. h = 6.63 x10-34 Js
vi. ε0 = 8.854 x10-12 𝑪𝟐 𝑵−𝟏 𝒎−𝟐
vii. Avogadro’s number = 6.023 X 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟑 per gram mole

SECTION-A
1. 1. Which of the following is not the property of an equipotential surface?
(a) They do not cross each other.
(b) The work done in carrying a charge from one point to another on an
equipotential surface is zero.
(c ) For a uniform electric field, they are concentric spheres.
(d) They can be imaginary spheres.

2. 2. An electric dipole placed in an electric field of intensity 2 × 105 N/C at an angle of


30° experiences a torque equal to 4 Nm. The charge on the dipole of dipole length
2 cm is
(a) 7 µC (b) 8 mC (c) 2 mC (d) 5 mC
P a g e 1 | 10
3. 3. A metallic plate exposed to white light emits electrons. For which of the following
colours of light, the stopping potential will be maximum?
(a) Blue (b) Yellow (c) Red (d) Violet

4. 4. When alpha particles are sent through a thin gold foil, most of them go straight
through the foil, because
(a) alpha particles are positively charged
(b) the mass of an alpha particle is more than the mass of an electron
(c) most of the part of an atom is empty space
(d) alpha particles move with high velocity

5. A An electron is moving along positive x-axis in a magnetic field which is parallel to


the positive y-axis. In what direction will the magnetic force be acting on the
electron?
(a) Along -x axis (b) Along -z axis
(c ) Along +z axis (d) Along -y axis

6. The relative magnetic permeability of a substance X is slightly less than unity and
that of substance Y is slightly more than unity, then
(a) X is paramagnetic and Y is ferromagnetic
(b) X is diamagnetic and Y is ferromagnetic
(c) X and Y both are paramagnetic
(d) X is diamagnetic and Y is paramagnetic

7. An ammeter of resistance 0.81 ohm reads up to 1 A. The value of the


required shunt to increase the range to 10 A is
(a) 0.9 ohm (b ) 0.09 ohm (c) 0.03 ohm (d) 0.3 ohm

8.A An electron with angular momentum L moving around the nucleus has a
magnetic moment given by
(a) e L/ 2m (b) e L/3m (c) e L /4m (d) e L / m

9. 9. The large scale transmission of electrical energy over long distances is done with
the use of transformers. The voltage output of the generator is stepped-up because
of
(a) reduction of current (b) reduction of current and voltage both
(c) power loss is cut down (d) (a ) and (c) both

10. The diagram below shows the electric field (E) and magnetic field (B) components
of an electromagnetic wave at a certain time and location.

P a g e 2 | 10
The direction of the propagation of the electromagnetic wave is
(a) perpendicular to E and B and out of plane of the paper
(b) perpendicular to E and B and into the plane of the paper
(c) parallel and in the same direction as E
(d) parallel and in the same direction as B
11. In a coil of resistance 100  a current is induced by changing the magnetic
flux through it. The variation of current with time is as shown in the figure. The
magnitude of change in flux through coil is

(a) 200 Wb (b) 275 Wb (c) 225 Wb (d) 250 Wb


12. The energy of an electron in nth orbit of hydrogen atom is En= - 13.6/𝑛2 𝑒𝑉.The
negative sign of energy indicates that
(a) electron is free to move.
(b) electron is bound to the nucleus.
(c) kinetic energy of electron is equal to potential energy of electron.
(d) atom is radiating energy.
For Questions 13 to 16, two statements are given –one labelled Assertion (A) and other
labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the options as
given below.
a) If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is correct explanation of
Assertion.
b) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct
explanation of Assertion.
c) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) If both Assertion and Reason are false.

13. Assertion (A): For the radiation of a frequency greater than the threshold frequency,
photoelectric current is proportional to the intensity of the radiation.
Reason (R) : Greater the number of energy quanta available, greater is the
number of electrons absorbing the energy quanta and greater
is number of electrons coming out of the metal.
14. Assertion (A) : Putting p type semiconductor slab directly in physical contact
with n type semiconductor slab cannot form the pn junction.
Reason (R) : The roughness at contact will be much more than inter atomic
crystal spacing and continuous flow of charge carriers is not
possible.

P a g e 3 | 10
15. Assertion (A) : An electron has a higher potential energy when it is at a location
associated with a negative value of potential and has a lower
potential energy when at a location associated with a positive
potential.
Reason (R) : Electrons move from a region of higher potential to a region of
lower potential.
16. Assertion (A) : Propagation of light through an optical fibre is due to total
internal reflection taking place at the core-cladding interface.
Reason (R): Refractive index of the material of the cladding of the optical fibre
is greater than that of the core.

SECTION-B
17. (a) Name the device which utilizes unilateral action of a pn diode to convert
ac into dc.
(b) Draw the circuit diagram of full wave rectifier.

18. The wavelength λ of a photon and the de Broglie wavelength of an electron of mass
m have the same value. Show that the energy of the photon is 2λmc/h times the
kinetic energy of the electron, where c and h have their usual meanings.

19. A ray of monochromatic light passes through an equilateral glass prism in such a
way that the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of emergence and each of these
angles is 3/4 times the angle of the prism. Determine the angle of deviation and the
refractive index of the glass prism.

20. A heating element using nichrome connected to a 230 V supply draws an initial
current of 3.2 A which settles after a few seconds to a steady value of 2.8 A. What
is the steady temperature of the heating element if the room temperature is 27.0 °C
and the temperature coefficient of resistance of nichrome is 1.70 × 10 –4 °C–1 ?

21. Show that the least possible distance between an object and its real image in a
convex lens is 4f, where f is the focal length of the lens.

OR

In an astronomical telescope in normal adjustment a straight black line of length L is


drawn on the objective lens. The eyepiece forms a real image of this line whose
length is 𝑙. What is the angular magnification of the telescope?
SECTION-C
22. A given coin has a mass of 3.0 g. Calculate the nuclear energy that would be required
to separate all the neutrons and protons from each other. For simplicity assume that
the coin is entirely made of 63
29𝐶𝑢 atoms (of mass 62.92960 u).
Given mp = 1.007825u and mn = 1.008665u.

P a g e 4 | 10
23. Charges (+q) and (–q) are placed at the points A and B respectively which are a
distance 2L apart. C is the midpoint between A and B. What is the work done in
moving a charge +Q along the semicircle CRD.

24. The total energy of an electron in the first excited state of the hydrogen atom is
about –3.4 eV.
a. What is the kinetic energy of the electron in this state?
b. What is the potential energy of the electron in this state?
c. Which of the answers above would change if the choice of the zero of potential
energy is changed?

25. A wire of uniform cross-section and resistance 4 ohm is bent in the shape of square
ABCD. Point A is connected to a point P on DC by a wire AP of resistance 1 ohm.
When a potential difference is applied between A and C, the points B and P are seen
to be at the same potential. What is the resistance of the part DP?

26. The given figure shows a long straight wire of a circular cross-section (radius a)
carrying steady current I. The current I is uniformly distributed across this cross-
section. Calculate the magnetic field in the region r < a and r > a.

27. Identify the part of the electromagnetic spectrum which:


a) produces heating effect,
b) is absorbed by the ozone layer in the atmosphere,
c) is used for studying crystal structure.

Write any one method of the production of each of the above radiations.

28. a. Define mutual inductance and write its SI unit.

P a g e 5 | 10
b. Two circular loops, one of small radius r and other of larger radius R, such that
R >> r, are placed coaxially with centres coinciding. Obtain the mutual inductance of
the arrangement.
OR
Two long straight parallel current carrying conductors are kept ‘a’ distant apart in air.
The direction of current in both the conductors is same. Find the magnitude of force
per unit length and direction of the force between them. Hence define one ampere.
SECTION-D
Case Study Based Questions
29. Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow.
A semiconductor diode is basically a pn junction with metallic contacts provided at
the ends for the application of an external voltage. It is a two terminal device. When
an external voltage is applied across a semiconductor diode such that p-side is
connected to the positive terminal of the battery and n-side to the negative terminal,
it is said to be forward biased. When an external voltage is applied across the diode
such that n-side is positive and p-side is negative, it is said to be reverse biased.
An ideal diode is one whose resistance in forward biasing is zero and the resistance
is infinite in reverse biasing. When the diode is forward biased, it is found that
beyond forward voltage called knee voltage, the conductivity is very high. When the
biasing voltage is more than the knee voltage the potential barrier is overcome and
the current increases rapidly with increase in forward voltage. When the diode is
reverse biased, the reverse bias voltage produces a very small current about a few
microamperes which almost remains constant with bias. This small current is
reverse saturation current.
i. In the given figure, a diode D is connected to an external resistance R = 100  and
an emf of 3.5 V. If the barrier potential developed across the diode is 0.5 V, the
current in the circuit will be:

(a) 40 mA (b) 20 mA (c) 35 mA (d) 30 mA

ii. In which of the following figures, the pn diode is reverse biased?


(a) (b) (c) +5V
(d) +10V
–12V
R R
R +5V R

– 10V
– 5V

iii. Based on the V-I characteristics of the diode, we can classify diode as
(a) bilateral device (b) ohmic device
(c) non-ohmic device (d) passive element

P a g e 6 | 10
OR

Two identical PN junctions can be connected in series by three different methods


as shown in the figure. If the potential difference in the junctions is the same, then
the correct connections will be

P N N P P N P N N P N P

+ – + – + –

1 2 3

(a) in the circuits (1) and (2) (b) in the circuits (2) and (3)
(c) in the circuits (1) and (3) (d) only in the circuit (1)

iv.

The V-I characteristic of a diode is shown in the figure. The ratio of the resistance
of the diode at I = 15 mA to the resistance at V = -10 V is
(a) 100 (b) 106 (c) 10 (d) 10-6

30. Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow.

Types of Lenses and their combination


A convex or converging lens is thicker at the centre than at the edges. It converges
a beam of light on refraction through it. It has a real focus. Convex lens is of three
types: Double convex lens, Plano convex lens and Concavo-convex lens.

Concave lens is thinner at the centre than at the edges. It diverges a beam of
light on refraction through it. It has a virtual focus. Concave lenses are of three types:
Double concave lens, Plano concave lens and Convexo-concave lens.

When two thin lenses of focal lengths f1 and f2 are placed in contact with each other
along their common principal axis, then the two lens system is regarded as a single
lens of focal length f and

P a g e 7 | 10
1 1 1
= +
𝑓 𝑓1 𝑓2
If several thin lenses of focal length f1, f2, .... fn are placed in contact, then the
effective focal length of the combination is given by
1 1 1 1
= + + ..... +
f f1 f 2 fn
and in terms of power, we can write
P = P1 + P2 + .... + Pn
The value of focal length and power of a lens must be used with proper sign
consideration.

i. Two thin lenses are kept coaxially in contact with each other and the focal length of
the combination is 80 cm. If the focal length of one lens is 20 cm, the focal length of
the other would be
(a) -26.7cm (b) 60cm (c) 80cm (d) 30cm

ii. A spherical air bubble is embedded in a piece of glass. For a ray of light
passing through the bubble, it behaves like a
(a) converging lens
(b) diverging lens
(c) mirror
(d) thin plane sheet of glass

iii. Lens generally used in magnifying glass is


(a) single concave lens
(b) single convex lens
(c) combination of convex lens of lower power and concave lens of lower focal
length
(d) Planoconcave lens

iv. The magnification of an image by a convex lens is positive only when the
object is placed
(a) at its focus F
(b) between F and 2F
(c) at 2F
(d) between F and optical centre

OR
A convex lens of 20 cm focal length forms a real image which is three times
magnified. The distance of the object from the lens is
(a) 13.33 cm (b) 14 cm (c) 26.66 cm (d) 25 cm

P a g e 8 | 10
SECTION-E
31. i. Draw a ray diagram for the formation of image of a point object by a thin double
convex lens having radii of curvature R1 and R2. Hence derive lens maker’s formula.
ii A converging lens has a focal length of 10 cm in air. It is made of a material of
refractive index 1.6. If it is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.3, find its new
focal length.

OR
i. Define a wavefront. How is it different from a ray?
ii. Using Huygens’s construction of secondary wavelets draw a diagram showing the
passage of a plane wavefront from a denser to a rarer medium. Using it verify Snell’s
law.
iii. In a double slit experiment using light of wavelength 600nm and the angular width of
the fringe formed on a distant screen is 0.1°. Find the spacing between the two slits.
iv. Write two differences between interference pattern and diffraction pattern.
32. i. Derive an expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with air present
between the two plates.
ii. Obtain the equivalent capacitance of the network shown in figure. For a 300 V supply,
determine the charge on each capacitor.

OR

i. A dielectric slab of thickness 't’ is kept between the plates of a parallel plate
capacitor with plate separation 'd' (t < d). Derive the expression for the capacitance
of the capacitor.
ii. A capacitor of capacity 𝐶1 is charged to the potential of 𝑉𝑜 . On disconnecting with the
battery, it is connected with an uncharged capacitor of capacity 𝐶2 as shown in the
adjoining figure. Find the ratio of energies before and after the connection of switch 𝑆.

P a g e 9 | 10
33.a. Draw graphs showing the variations of inductive reactance and capacitive reactance
with frequency of applied ac source.
b. Draw the phasor diagram for a series LRC circuit connected to an AC source.

c. When an alternating voltage of 220V is applied across a device X, a current of 0.25A


flows which lags behind the applied voltage in phase by π/2 radian. If the same
voltage is applied across another device Y, the same current flows but now it is in
phase with the applied voltage.
(i) Name the devices X and Y.
(ii) Calculate the current flowing in the circuit when the same voltage is applied
across the series combination of X and Y.

OR
a. A series LCR circuit is connected to an ac source. Using the phasor diagram, derive
the expression for the impedance of the circuit.
b. Plot a graph to show the variation of current with frequency of the ac source ,
explaining the nature of its variation for two different resistances R1 and R2 (R1< R2)
at resonance.

P a g e 10 | 10
Class: XII Session 2023-24
SUBJECT: PHYSICS(THEORY)
MARKING SCHEME
SECTION A
A1: c 1M
4
A2: c q = /[(2a) E sin ] = 2×10−2 × 2 × 105sin 30° 1M
= 2 × 10–3 C = 2 mC
A3: d Higher the frequency, greater is the stopping potential 1M
A4: c 1M
A5: b 1M
A6: d 1M
A7: b 1M

9 x S = 1 × 0.81
0.81
S= = 0.09 
9
A8: a 1M
A9: d 1M
A10: a 1M
 1 
A11: d e= ,I = 1M
t R t

I t = = Area under I – t graph, R = 100 ohm
R
1
  = 100   10  0.5 = 250 Wb.
2
A12: b 1M
A13: a 1M
A14: a 1M
A15: c 1M
Q16: c 1M
SECTION B
A17: (a) Rectifier 1M
(b) Circuit diagram of full wave rectifier 1M
A18: As λ = h / mv , v= h /mλ -----------------(i) 1/2M
Energy of photon E = hc /λ 1/2M
& Kinetic energy of electron K =1/2 mv2 = ½ mh2 / m2 λ2 --------------(ii) 1/2M
Simplifying equation i & ii we get E / K = 2λmc /h 1/2M
A19: Here angle of prism A = 60°, angle of incidence i = angle of emergence e and
under this condition angle of deviation is minimum
3 3
 i=e= A = × 60° = 45° and i + e = A + D,
4 4
hence Dm = 2i – A = 2 × 45° – 60° = 30° 1M
 Refractive index of glass prism
 A + Dm   60 + 30 
sin   sin   sin 45 1 2
n=  2 =  2 = = = 2. 1M
 A  60  sin 30 1 2
sin   sin  
2  2 
A20:Given: V=230 V, I0= 3.2A, I=2.8A, 𝑇0 =27 0C, α=1.70 × 10–4 °C–1.

Using equation R =R0 (1+ α ∆T) ½M

i.e V/ I = {V/ I0 } [1 + α ∆T] ½M


and solving ∆T= 840 , i.e. T = 840 + 27 = 867 0C 1M
A21: Let d be the least distance between object and image for a real image formation.

½M

1 1 1 1 1 1 𝑑
= − , = 𝑥 + 𝑑−𝑥 = 𝑥(𝑑−𝑥) ½M
f v u 𝑓

𝑑±√𝑑2 −4𝑓𝑑
fd = xd – x2 , x2 – dx + fd = 0 , x = ½M
2
For real roots of x, d2 – 4fd  0 ½M
d  4f.
OR
Let fo and fe be the focal length of the objective and eyepiece respectively.
For normal adjustment the distance from objective to eyepiece is fo + fe.
Taking the line on the objective as object and eyepiece as lens
u = –(fo + fe ) and f = fe

1 1 1
− [ −{ 𝑓o + 𝑓𝑒} ]
= ⇒ 1M
𝑣 𝑓𝑒
𝑣 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑧𝑒 𝑓𝑒 𝑙
Linear magnification (eyepiece) = = 𝑂𝑏𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑧𝑒 = =𝐿 ½M
𝑢 𝑓𝑜

∴ Angular magnification of telescope


𝑓 𝐿
M = 𝑓0 = 𝑙 ½M
𝑒

SECTION C
A22: Number of atoms in 3 gram of Cu coin = (6.023 x 10 23 X 3 ) / 63 = 2.86 X 1022 ½M
Each atom has 29 Protons & 34 Neutrons

Thus Mass defect ∆m= 29X 1.00783 + 34X 1.00867 – 62.92960 u =0.59225u 1M
Nuclear energy required for one atom =0.59225 X 931.5 MeV ½M
Nuclear energy required for 3 gram of Cu =0.59225 X 931.5 X 2.86X 1022MeV
= 1.58 X 1025 MeV 1M

A23:

VC = 0, 1M
1  q q −q
VD =
40  3L − L  = 6 L 1M
  0

−Qq
W = Q [VD – VC] = 1M
60 L

A24 : formula K=-E , U = -2K 1M


(a) K = 3.4 eV & (b) U= -6.8 eV 1M
(c) The kinetic energy of the electron will not change. The value of potential energy and
consequently, the value of total energy of the electron will change. 1M

A25:

1.5M
(1+𝑥)
1 (2+𝑥)
As the points B and P are at the same potential, 1 = ⇒ 𝑥 = (√2 − 1) 𝑜ℎ𝑚 1.5M
(1−𝑥)
A26:

(a) Consider the case r > a. The Amperian loop, labelled 2, is a circle concentric with the cross-section.
For this loop, L = 2 π r
Using Ampere circuital Law, we can write,
0 I 1
B (2π r) = μ0 I , B= , B (r > a) 1.5 M
2r r
(b)Consider the case r < a. The Amperian loop is a circle labelled 1. For this loop, taking the radius of
the circle to be r, L=2πr
Now the current enclosed Ie is not I, but is less than this value. Since the current distribution is uniform,
the current enclosed is,
 r 2  Ir 2 Ir 2
Ie = I  
2 
= Using Ampere’s law, B (2r) = µ0
 a  a2 a2
 0 I 
B=  2 
r Br (r < a) 1.5M
 2a 
A27: (a) Infrared (b) Ultraviolet (c) X rays ½+½ +½ M
Any one method of the production of each one ½+½ +½ M

A28 (a ) : Definition and S.I. Unit. ½ + ½ M

(b)

Let a current IP flow through the circular loop of radius R. The magnetic induction at the centre of the
loop is

½M
As, r << R, the magnetic induction BP may be considered to be constant over the entire cross sectional
area of inner loop of radius r. Hence magnetic flux linked with the smaller loop will be

½M

Also, ½M
∴ ½M
OR
The magnetic induction B1 set up by the current I1 flowing in first conductor at a point somewhere in the
middle of second conductor is
 0 I1
B1 = ...(1) ½ M
2 a

The magnetic force acting on the portion P2Q2 of length 2 of second conductor is
F2 = I2 2 B1 sin 90° ...(2)
From equation (1) and (2),
 0 I1 I 2
F2 = 2
, towards first conductor ½M
2a
F2 0 I1 I 2
= ...(3)
2 2a
The magnetic induction B2 set up by the current I2 flowing in second conductor at a point somewhere in
the middle of first conductor is
0 I2
B2 = ...(4) ½M
2a
The magnetic force acting on the portion P1Q1 of length 1 of first conductor is
F1 = I1 1B2 sin 90° ...(5)
From equation (3) and (5)
 0 I1 I 2
F1 = 1
, towards second conductor ½M
2a
F1 0 I1 I 2
= ...(6)
1 2a
The standard definition of 1A
If I1 = I2 = 1A
1 = 2 = 1m
F1 F2 0  1 1
a = 1m in V/A then = = = 2  10−7 N/m
1 2 2  1

 One ampere is that electric current which when flows in each one of the two infinitely long
straight parallel conductors placed 1m apart in vacuum causes each one of them to experience a force
of 2 × 10–7 N/m. 1M
SECTION D
A29 (i) d (ii) c (iii) c OR b (iv) d
A30: (i) a (ii) b (iii) b (iv) d OR c

SECTION E
A31: i. DIAGRAM/S : 1M
DERIVATION : 2M
NUMERICAL : 2M
Lens maker’s Formula

When a ray refracts from a lens (double convex), in above figure, then its image formation can be
seen in term of two steps :
Step 1: The first refracting surface forms the image I1 of the object O

Step 2: The image of object O for first surface acts like a virtual object for the second surface.
Now for the first surface ABC, ray will move from rarer to denser medium, then
n2 n n −n
+ 1 = 2 1 ...(i) ½M
BI1 OB BC1
Similarly for the second interface, ADC we can write.
𝑛1 𝑛 𝑛2 −𝑛1
− 𝐷𝐼2 = ...(ii) ½M
𝐷𝐼 1 𝐷𝐶2
DI1 is negative as distance is measured against the direction of incident light.
Adding equation (1) and equation (2), we get
𝑛2 𝑛 𝑛 𝑛 𝑛2 −𝑛1 𝑛2 −𝑛1
+ 𝑂𝐵1 + 𝐷𝐼1 − 𝐷𝐼2 = +
𝐵𝐼1 1 𝐵𝐶1 𝐷𝐶2
n1 n  1 1 
or + 1 = (n2 − n1 )  +  ...(iii) ( for thin lens BI1 = DI1)
DI OB  BC1 DC2 
Now, if we assume the object to be at infinity i.e. OB → , then its image will form at focus F (with
focal length f), i.e. ½M
DI = f, thus equation (iii) can be rewritten as
n1 n1  1 1 
+ = (n2 − n1 )  + 
f   BC1 DC2 
n1  1 1 
or = (n2 − n1 )  +  ...(iv)
f  BC1 DC2 
Now according to the sign conventions
BC1 = +R1 and DC2 = –R2 ...(v) ½M
Substituting equation (v) in equation (iv), we get
n1  1 1 
= (n2 − n1 )  − 
f  R1 R2 
1  n2  1 1 
=  − 1 − 
f  n1  R1 R2 
1  1 1 
= (n21 − 1)  − 
f  R1 R2 
1  1 1 
(ii) = (1.6 − 1)  −  ...(1) 1M
fa  R1 R2 
1 1.6   1 1 
= − 1  −  ….(2) 1M
f 1.3   R1 R2 
From equation (1) and (2)
f  0.6 
=  1.3  f = 2.6  10 cm  f = 26 cm
f a  0.3 

OR

(i) A wavefront is defined as a surface of constant phase.


(a) The ray indicates the direction of propagation of wave while the wavefront is the surface of
constant phase.
(b) The ray at each point of a wavefront is normal to the wavefront at that point.
1M
(ii) AB: Incident Plane Wave Front & CE is Refracted Wave front . 2M
Sin i =BC/AC & Sin r = AE /AC
Sin i / Sinr = BC /AE = v1 /v2 = constant
 6  10−7
(iii) Ѳ = λ /a i.e. a= = = 3.4  10−4 m 1M
 0.1 
180
(iv) Two differences between interference pattern and diffraction pattern 1M
A32: (i) Derivation of the expression for the capacitance 2M

Let the two plates be kept parallel to each other separated by a distance d and cross-sectional area of each plate
is A. Electric field by a single thin plate E = σ /2ϵo
Total electric field between the plates E= σ / ϵo = Q/A ϵo
Potential difference between the plates V=Ed = [Q/A ϵo ] d.
Capacitance C= Q / V = Aϵo / d

(ii)

1M
200
The equivalent capacitance = pF
3
200
charge on C4 = × 10−12 × 300= 2 × 10–8 C, ½M
3
200  10−12  300
potential difference across C4 = = 200 V
3  100  10−12
potential difference across C1 = 300 – 200 = 100 V
charge on C1 = 100 × 10–12 × 100 = 1 × 10–8 C ½M
potential difference across C2 and C3 series combination = 100 V
potential difference across C2 and C3 each = 50 V
charge on C2 and C3 each = 200 × 10–12 × 50 = 1 × 10–8 C ½+½ M
OR
(i) Derivation of the expression for capacitance with dielectric slab (t < d) 3M

(ii)
Before the connection of switch S,
Initial energy Ui = ½M
After the connection of switch S

common potential V = ½M

Final energy = Uf = ½M
Uf : Ui = C1 /(C1 + C2 ) ½M
A33:
(a)

½+½M

(b)

1M
(c)(i) In device X, Current lags behind the voltage by π /2, X is an inductor
In device Y, Current in phase with the applied voltage, Y is resistor ½+½M
(ii) We are given that
0.25=220/XL, XL =880Ω, Also 0.25=220/R, R = 880Ω 1M
For the series combination of X and Y,
Equivalent impedance Z = 880 √2 Ω , I= 0.177 A 1M

OR
a.

1M
E = E0 sinωt is applied to a series LCR circuit. Since all three of them are connected in series the current
through them is same. But the voltage across each element has a different phase relation with current.
The potential difference VL, VC and VR across L, C and R at any instant is given by
VL = IXL, VC = IXC and VR = IR, where I is the current at that instant.
VR is in phase with I. VL leads I by 90° and VC lags behind I by 90° so the phasor diagram will be as shown
Assuming VL > VC, the applied emf E which is equal to resultant of potential drop across R, L & C is given as
E2 = I2 [ R2 + ( XL - XC)2 ]
𝐸 𝐸
Or 𝐼= = 𝑍 , where Z is Impedance. 3M
√[ 𝑅2 + ( 𝑋𝐿 − 𝑋𝐶 )2 ]
𝑉𝐿 −𝑉𝐶 𝑋𝐿 −𝑋𝐶
Emf leads current by a phase angle φ as tan φ = =
𝑅 𝑅

b. The curve (i) is for R1 and the curve (ii) is for R2 1M


UNDER THE VALUABLE AND ABLE GUIDANCE OF
NAME NAME OF KV DESIGNATION
SRI A.K.SHARMA O.F. DUMDUM PRINCIPAL
SRI SUDIP MANDAL KHARAGPUR PRINCIPAL
RAILWAY COLONY

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS
RESOURCE PERSON NAME OF KV DESIGNATION
SHRI UDAY SHANKAR PAUL KV COSSIPORE PGT PHYSICS

FULL NAME OF TEACHER NAME OF KV DESIGNATION


NAWIN KUMAR Durgapur (CRPF) PGT PHYSICS
ANUPAMA DUTTA Garden Reach PGT PHYSICS
JAYASHREE SAHOO Fort William PGT PHYSICS
ARUN PRATAP SINGH Sevoke Road PGT PHYSICS
SANDIP KUMAR KHAN Fort William PGT PHYSICS
DIPANKAR SENAPATI Santragachi PGT PHYSICS
VIVEKA NAND MISHRA Ishapore No.2 PGT PHYSICS
VERMA RINI CHARNESHKUMAR Sukna (Khaprail) PGT PHYSICS
Ajay kumar Kanchrapara No.2 PGT PHYSICS
Tapan Kumar Kar Kharagpur (IIT) PGT PHYSICS
UTPAL KUMAR GHOSH Durgapur (CMERI) PGT PHYSICS
Dhaarna babbar Kanchrapara No.1 PGT PHYSICS
TAMAL BISWAS Ballygunge PGT PHYSICS
PRIYAM KUNDU Farakka (NTPC) PGT PHYSICS
SUNITA GUHA Ishapore No.1 PGT PHYSICS

You might also like